JP7457274B2 - Slot Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of displaying game history information .

There is known a conventional gaming machine that stores the cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts in a graph according to a player's operation (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-125121 A

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to make it possible to easily check game history information .

The present invention
Equipped with a predetermined display means capable of displaying gaming history information,
The gaming history information is composed of information regarding the type of gaming history and numerical information regarding the gaming history,
As game history information, there are cases where information on the ratio of accessories for a predetermined number of games is displayed, cases where information on the ratio of cumulative accessories is displayed, and cases where information on the ratio of consecutive accessories is displayed on the cumulative basis,
Numerical information regarding the game history corresponding to the accessory ratio information for the predetermined number of games is the accessory ratio for the predetermined number of games (the payout of game media when the accessory is activated in the predetermined number of games relative to the total number of payouts of game media in the predetermined number of games) (percentage of numbers),
The numerical information regarding the game history corresponding to the cumulative accessory ratio information is the cumulative accessory ratio (the ratio of the number of game media paid out when the accessory is activated to the total number of game media paid out),
Numerical information regarding the game history corresponding to the cumulative continuous accessory ratio information is the cumulative first type special accessory ratio (the ratio of the number of game media paid out when the first type special accessory is activated to the total number of game media paid out) ) and
The first display section and the second display section of the predetermined display means are capable of displaying information regarding the type of gaming history,
The third display section and the fourth display section of the predetermined display means are capable of displaying numerical information regarding the gaming history,
When displaying game history information on the predetermined display means, the DP segment of the second display section is configured to be lightable;
When displaying the cumulative accessory ratio information, if the cumulative number of games is less than a specific value, information regarding the type of game history corresponding to the cumulative accessory ratio information can be displayed blinking;
When displaying accessory ratio information for a predetermined number of games, if the total number of games played is less than a predetermined value (the predetermined value is a value smaller than a specific value), the game history corresponding to the accessory ratio information for a predetermined number of games is displayed. It is configured so that information about the type can be displayed blinking.
When the total number of game media to be paid out reaches a predetermined upper limit, updating of the total number of game media to be paid out is terminated;
When the cumulative number of games has reached a specific upper limit (the specific upper limit may be the same as a predetermined upper limit), the update of the cumulative number of games has been terminated.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, game history information can be easily confirmed .

It is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a storage number display LED, an advantageous section display LED, an acquisition number display LED, a settlement switch, etc. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a main control board housed in a board case, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining details of digits and segments. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels. It is a diagram showing a display window (transparent window) provided in a slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, active lines, etc. It is a diagram (1) showing the combination of the type of winning combination, the number of coins to be paid out, and the symbols. It is a diagram (2) showing combinations of types of winning combinations, number of coins to be paid out, and symbols. It is a diagram (3) showing the type of winning combination, the number of coins to be paid out, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (4) showing the type of winning combination, the number of payout pieces, and the combination of symbols. It is a diagram (5) showing the type of winning combination, the number of payout pieces, and the combination of symbols. It is a diagram (6) showing the type of winning combination, the number of payout pieces, and the combination of symbols. FIG. 1 shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning role, and the pressing order. It is a diagram (2) showing the relationship between the condition device, its winning combination, and the order of pressing. It is a diagram (3) showing the relationship between the condition device, its winning combination, and the order of pressing. It is a diagram (4) showing the relationship between the condition device, its winning combination, and the order of pressing. It is a figure (1) which shows a number table. It is a figure (2) which shows a number table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a push order instruction number table. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship among a push order instruction number, an advantageous push order, and display contents. It is a figure showing a performance group number table. It is a figure explaining transition of RT. It is a figure which shows the lighting process of advantageous area display LED. 12 is a timing chart (Example 1 and Example 2) showing the flow of processing of the main control board, the acquisition number display LED, and the image display device. 12 is a timing chart (Example 3 and Example 4) showing the flow of processing of the main control board, the acquisition number display LED, and the image display device. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display of the press order instruction information by acquisition number display LED, and the notification of the correct answer press order by an image display device. It is a part of RWM, and is a diagram showing a storage area related to an advantageous section and the total number of games. It is a part of RWM, and is a diagram showing a storage area related to the total number of payout coins. This is a diagram showing a part of the RWM, and a memory area related to the number of coins paid out when a continuous reel is activated. It is a part of RWM, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the memory|storage area regarding the payout number at the time of accessory operation|operation. It is a part of RWM, Comprising: It is a figure (modification) which shows the memory|storage area regarding the payout number at the time of continuous accessory operation|movement. It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing for updating the number of games etc. using a register. 33 is a flowchart showing specific example 1 in steps S109 to S114 in FIG. 32. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a second specific example in steps S109 to S114 in FIG. 32. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a third specific example in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32. FIG. It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing for updating the number of games etc. without using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of calculation processing of an advantageous section ratio. It is a figure explaining the information displayed on management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on storage number display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on acquisition number display LED. 1 is an external perspective view showing a base portion 1 of a slot machine 10. FIG. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a main control board accommodated in a board case in a second embodiment, where FIG. 11A shows Example 1 and FIG.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows. "RT" means that the type (number) of conditional devices (1BB, replay, small role) that are subject to lottery and their winning probability are unique lottery conditions, and "RT transition" means Shifting from one RT to another RT means that the winning probability of at least one conditional device (for example, replay) that is a lottery target changes. Therefore, the probability of winning for each type of replay in one RT is a value unique to that RT, and the probability of winning for each type of replay in one RT and another RT will not be the same. do not have. However, it is acceptable for one RT and another RT to have the same total replay winning probability.

In this embodiment, the RTs include non-RTs, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 (FIG. 22, which will be described later). Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, in this specification, "RT" includes non-RT. In this embodiment, non-internal is defined as non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and internal is defined as RT4. The type (number) of replays to be drawn and the probability of winning are different between non-internal and internal.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RT during special play. In this embodiment, both 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation result in a drawing of at least one replay. A "role" refers to something that is the subject of a drawing, and in this embodiment, a condition device is drawn, and the condition device is set to include at least one role. Therefore, when any of the condition devices is won, at least one role is won (there is at least one winning role).

The condition device to be drawn has a “accessory condition device” that includes either a “special role (accessory object)” and a “winning and replay condition device” that includes either a small role or a replay. . The “accessory condition device” includes any of the special winnings. When a special prize is won, a device that makes it easier to win a small prize is SB (Single Bonus), RB (First Class Special Prize; Regular Bonus), CB (Second Class Special Prize; Challenge Bonus), 1BB (first type accessory continuous operating device; first type big bonus) and 2BB (second type accessory continuous operating device; second type big bonus) are activated.

Here, the first-class accessory continuous operating device (1BB) refers to a device that can continuously operate the first-class special accessory (RB). Similarly, the second type special accessory continuous operating device (2BB) refers to a device that can continuously operate the second type special accessory (CB). In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special winning combination, and there are two types (1BBA and 1BBB) to be described later. During the operation of 1BB, RB will end when either winning the winning combination twice or playing 2 games is satisfied, and after that end, RB will be activated again on the condition that the end conditions of 1BB operation are not met. . Further, in this embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the "winning and replay condition device" includes either a small winning combination or a replay in which winning information is not carried over to the next game or later. In this embodiment, winning and replay condition device numbers "0" to "30" are provided. On the other hand, the "accessory condition device" includes either RB, 1BB, and 2BB that can carry over winning information to the next game or later, or SB or CB that does not carry over winning information to the next game or later. In this embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) are provided in which winning information can be carried over to the next game or later.

If you win a bonus condition device that includes any of the special prizes that can be carried over to the next game, the winning information of the special prize will be retained until the combination of symbols corresponding to that special prize stops on the active line. carry over to the next game. A game in which the winning information is not won in the accessory condition device that includes any of the special combinations that can be carried over to the next game or later is referred to as a "non-internal game." On the other hand, when you win a special role condition device, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the won special role has not yet stopped on the active line, in other words, the game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over is called "internal play". That's what it means. In this embodiment, a game in which the accessory condition device is won is included in the "non-internal", but a game in which the accessory condition device is won may be included in the "internal".

The "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch refers to an operation mode in which a combination with a large payout number is won in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch produces an advantageous/disadvantageous game result (combination of symbols that stop on a winning line), or an operation mode in which a combination that transitions (promotes) to an advantageous RT or does not transition (falls) to an unfavorable RT is won. The "advantageous operation mode" is also called the correct operation mode.

The "operation mode" is a concept that refers to the order in which the stop switch is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on the valid line). In this embodiment, "games with advantageous operation modes of the stop switch" correspond to games when the push order bell (small role group B, small role group C) is won, and games when a duplicate replay (replay group B, replay group C) is won.

Furthermore, when the bells in the push order are won, the bells (minor prizes) that will be won when the stop switch is operated in the correct pressing order will be changed to the higher bell (out of the group of bells (minor prizes) that have been won repeatedly, the number of winnings will be The most common small winning combination is sometimes referred to as a bell (small winning combination) in which it is most advantageous for the player if the combination of symbols is displayed. On the other hand, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect push order, the cheap bell may win or the winning combination may be missed depending on the timing of the stop switch operation. In this embodiment, the stop numbers (combination of symbols on the active line, also referred to as "dropped numbers") that are displayed when a winning combination is missed are referred to as "pattern symbols" and have pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, when there is a double replay win (when Replay B and Replay C are won), different combinations of symbols are displayed depending on the order in which the stop switch is pressed, but there is no missed chance when a replay is won ("PB=1" described below). In this case, a press sequence that displays a combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player, such as a combination of symbols that transitions to an RT with a higher probability of winning a replay, or a combination of symbols that maintains an RT with a high probability of winning a replay, is called a "correct press sequence" or "promotion press sequence." In contrast, a press sequence that displays a combination of symbols that transitions from an RT that is advantageous to the player (such as an RT with a high probability of winning a replay) to an RT that is disadvantageous to the player (such as an RT with a low probability of winning a replay) is called an "incorrect press sequence" or "demotion (downgrade) press sequence."

The "instruction function" refers to a function of displaying (notifying) the above-mentioned "advantageous operation mode" to the player. In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, if the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates winning of small prizes, the "instruction function" displays the correct pressing order for winning the correct pressing order (higher bell) when the pressing order bell is won. This does not include displaying the order in which correct answers are pressed to win an advantageous replay (replay to shift to an advantageous RT or replay to maintain an advantageous RT) in the event of a replay duplicate win.

In the following embodiments, the "instruction function" refers to a function that displays "advantageous operation modes" to the player, and the "operation of the instruction function" refers to the function of displaying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won. , and displaying the correct answer pressing order to win an advantageous replay in the event of multiple replay wins. Note that "display" refers to showing the content of the "instruction" to the player, and "notification" refers to notifying the player of the content of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function." Furthermore, although the term "instruction" is a concept that has the connotation of "command," the player will not be subject to any penalty even if he or she does not follow the "instruction." However, if you do not follow the correct pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function, the higher number of bells may not win when you win the pressing order bell, or the unfavorable replay may win when you win multiple replays.

In addition, "instruction function activation game" refers to a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (a conditional device that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (small role B group, small role C group, replay B group, replay C This means a game in which the instruction function is activated in the game in which the winning group). Therefore, the instruction function activation game is one game. The instruction function activation game may also be referred to as an information game. Further, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, if the instruction function is not activated, the game is not an instruction function activation game.

In this embodiment, the "gaming section" includes a "normal section," a "standby section," and an "advantageous section." First of all, the "normal section" refers to signals related to the instruction function, specifically the press order instruction number and winning/replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct press order), which will be described later, to the peripheral board (for example, sub-control Refers to a gaming section where transmission to the board) is prohibited, and which does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (the instruction function is not activated). However, in addition to the lottery of conditional devices (combinations), it is possible to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section (by lottery, etc.). In the normal section, the instruction function must not be activated, so the push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (LED, etc.) electrically connected to the main control board, and the instruction function cannot be activated. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is also impossible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode using an image display device electrically connected to the sub-control board, which will be described later.

In the normal section, when deciding to move to the advantageous section, it is necessary to associate (link) with the winning conditional device and make the transfer decision. Here, determining whether to move to an advantageous section in association with the winning condition device means that it is determined whether to move to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery of the condition device, or when a specific condition device has been won. A separate lottery may be held to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section under the condition that

In this embodiment, it is set to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery of the condition device. Furthermore, the length of the advantageous section (number of games played) determined (winning) differs depending on the winning condition device. For example, if you decide to move to an advantageous section when you win 1BB, which will be described later, the initial value will be an advantageous section of 50 games counting from the end of the 1BB game, and when you win the small role E1 alone. When it is decided to move to an advantageous section, it may become an advantageous section where you only need to execute one instruction function activation game (excluding games that win small role C group, replay B group, and replay C group). be.

Furthermore, when deciding to move to an advantageous section by linking it with the winning condition device, we also provide a condition device that can determine whether to move to an advantageous section (separately, if a lottery is held to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section, , the condition device which is a condition for conducting the lottery) is set so that the condition device has no setting difference in winning probability. Here, the "setting value" is something that determines the player's advantage, and the higher (or lower) the setting value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the expected value of balls to be played). ) has been set. The setting values are provided in six stages, for example, settings 1 to 6. The term "conditional device with no setting difference in winning probability (common settings)" refers to a conditional device in which the winning probability is the same for all settings.

It should be noted that it is only "possible" to determine the transition to the advantageous zone in association with the winning of a conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, but when a conditional device that does not have a setting difference in winning probability wins. , does not mean that it is always necessary to shift to an advantageous section or to always perform a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section. Even when a conditional device with no set difference in winning probability wins, it is of course possible not to make any decision regarding the advantageous section.

On the other hand, "a conditional device having different winning probabilities (by setting)" means that the winning probabilities are not the same for all settings. For example, if the winning probability is different for all setting values, or if the winning probability of some setting values is different from the winning probability of some other setting values (for example, the winning probability of setting 1 to setting 5 is different). is "x" and the winning probability of setting 6 is "y (≠ x)").

In addition, the "advantageous section" is a gaming section that has the performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be activated), and specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction content is displayed on the main control board. (Advantageous operation mode) refers to a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board only when press order instruction information is displayed so that it can be identified. A game during an advantageous period may also be referred to as a notifiable game. Conversely, games during the normal section and games during the standby section may be referred to as non-notifiable games. However, the sub control board cannot output an effect that is contrary to the instruction content given by the main control board or the received signal related to the instruction function.

In the advantageous section of this embodiment, the maximum payout number ("9" pieces) corresponding to the specified number ("3" pieces) in a game where the instruction function activation game can be executed (when the accessory is not activated) can be obtained. In a game in which a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode (minor role B group) is won, instruct the operation mode of the stop switch in which the winning combination (minor role 01) related to the maximum payout number is won in at least one game or more. It is necessary.

Specifically, in this embodiment, a small winning combination B group and a small winning combination C group are provided as a so-called pushing order bell condition device. In the small winning combination B group, when the pressing order is correct, the small winning combination 01 with 9 cards always wins, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the winning combination is 1 winning (sometimes lost). On the other hand, in the small winning combination C group, when the pressing order is correct, the small winning combination 02 with 3 cards always wins, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the 1-card winning combination always wins.

The game when executing the instruction function activation game is when the accessory is not activated (normal game), and the prescribed number (number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is "3". Furthermore, when the specified number is "3", the maximum number of coins to be paid out is "9" (when the small winning combination 01 is won). Therefore, in the advantageous section of this embodiment, by activating the instruction function at the time of winning the condition device (small role B group) that allows the minor role 01 to win, the correct answer pressing order for winning the minor role 01 is determined. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

Further, during the advantageous section, in a game in which a condition device having an advantageous operation mode is won, an instruction function may be always operated to display an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. On the other hand, even in a game where a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode is won during an advantageous period, there is no problem even if the instruction function is not activated.

Furthermore, the "standby section" refers to a game section when the game has not yet moved to the advantageous section after it has been decided to move to the advantageous section. The standby section may or may not be provided. That is, the game may move from the normal section to the advantageous section, or from the normal section to the standby section, and then from the standby section to the advantageous section. It is not possible to move from the advantageous section to the standby section, and the game always moves to the normal section after the end of the advantageous section. The standby section can be moved only when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of a condition device including a special role that can be carried over to the next game or later, and must end in a game in which a combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is displayed. Of course, it may end before the game in which a combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is displayed. In addition, in the standby section, it is not possible to operate the instruction function in the main control board or to transmit a signal related to the instruction function to the sub-control board. When the instruction function is operated in the main control board and a signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub-control board, it is required that the game is in the advantageous section.

In the advantageous zone of this embodiment, there are cases where one instruction function activation game (excluding games that win small win group C, replay group B, and replay group C) is played, and cases where a predetermined number of games are played. In the advantageous zone where a predetermined number of games are played, when a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically activated. Note that the condition for ending the advantageous zone does not have to be the number of games described above, but may be, for example, to hold a termination (puncture) lottery at a predetermined timing, and end the advantageous zone when this lottery is won.

Alternatively, simply moving to an advantageous section does not satisfy the conditions for executing the instruction function activation game, and on the condition that the instruction function operation game is in the advantageous section, it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game. When it is decided to execute the instructed function activation game, the instruction function activated game may be executed until a predetermined termination condition is met. Also, during the advantageous section, a decision (by lottery, etc.) is made as to whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section. In addition, an upper limit number of games is set for the advantageous section, and when the upper limit number of games is reached, the advantageous section is always ended at that point even if there is a remaining number of games in the advantageous section (limiter). (operation), transition to normal section.

Furthermore, when the maximum number of games is reached, even if you have never won a conditional device (small role B group) that has an advantageous operation mode that allows you to obtain the maximum number of payout coins (9 coins), or you can win. However, even if you have never instructed how to operate the stop switch to win the winning combination (minor combination 01) related to the maximum payout number, the advantageous section will always end at that point (limiter is activated), and normally Move to section.

Although the content partially overlaps with the above, the advantageous section in this embodiment is defined as follows. a) In the normal section, the lottery to determine whether to move to the advantageous section (even if it is decided at the same time as the lottery for the condition device) must be linked to the condition device with no setting difference. In other words, the probability of transition to the advantageous section should not differ depending on the set value. b) The set value must not be referenced in the additional lottery for advantageous sections (even if the lottery is determined without conducting a lottery). When adding an advantageous section based on the winning condition device, it must be linked to the condition device with no difference in setting.

c) In the normal zone, during special roles (meaning special roles that carry over winning; the same applies in the following paragraphs) or during the operation of a special role, a lottery for transition to a favorable zone (even if it is determined at the same time as the lottery for the condition device) must not be conducted. In addition, during a special role, even if it is in a favorable zone, a lottery for adding the favorable zone (even if it is determined without a lottery) must not be conducted. Furthermore, when a condition device with a setting difference that includes a special role is won in a favorable zone and a special role is in operation, a lottery for adding the favorable zone (even if it is determined without a lottery) must not be conducted during the operation of the special role. Here, in the past, it was common to conduct an AT lottery even after entering the inside zone, so that even when entering the inside zone, it was possible to wait for the AT to be won while maintaining the inside zone without winning a special role. However, recently, it has been considered desirable not to conduct a lottery for an AT during the inside zone. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a special role is won in a normal zone and the zone is in the inside zone, it is stipulated that a transition from the normal zone to the favorable zone must not be made during the inside zone. Furthermore, if a special role is won during a favorable zone and the player is in the inner zone, the favorable zone cannot be added during that zone.

d) When it is decided to move to the advantageous section, in principle, the next game is transferred to the advantageous section, and until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, it is until it is possible to bet on the next game). ), it is necessary to display to the player that the next game will be in an advantageous section (by lighting a lamp, etc. to indicate that it is an advantageous section). Here, in the past, when winning an AT, it was common to play a certain number of games (via a precursor) from the time the AT was won until the player was notified of the AT win. Ta. For example, when AT is drawn based on the winning of a rare role, if the player fails to win the rare role in the game, the player will be informed that he or she has won the rare role and that AT was drawn based on that rare role. Therefore, even if the player wins AT by winning the rare combination, he or she may stop playing the game before the AT win is announced. There is a problem in that when another person plays a game on that machine after that, the other person may enjoy the AT benefits (that were reserved by the previous player). However, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section, as a general rule, the advantageous section will be displayed from the next game until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, until bets can be placed on the next game). Therefore, the above problem does not occur. In this way, conventionally, the AT winning is announced after the AT winning (particularly after passing through the AT precursor), but in this embodiment, as a general rule, the AT winning is announced until the next game bet can be made. The difference is that the advantageous section is displayed before the advantageous section starts. Furthermore, conventional AT winning notifications were only carried out as part of the performance, but in this embodiment, the player is informed that the next game will be in an advantageous section (a lamp indicating that it is an advantageous section). The difference is that this is done in order to solve the above problem.

Further, the advantageous section ratio refers to the proportion of players staying in advantageous sections with respect to all gaming sections (normal section + standby section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section between them is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%". Note that, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio is displayed, but the displayed advantageous section ratio is a numerical value obtained by rounding down the decimal point as a result of calculation.

The pull rate (PB) is the probability that the desired symbol can be stopped on the active line from the moment you operate the stop switch until the reel stops (maximum number of moving pieces). show. If the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol will be stopped on the active line (until the active line The fact that it is not possible (to pull in) is referred to as "PB (pull in rate) ≠ 1". On the other hand, no matter what position the reels are at the moment the stop switch is operated (regardless of the timing of the stop switch operation), it is possible to always stop (draw) the target symbol on the active line. = 1''.

And, "PB=1" has a case where all reels are like that for the winning combination, and a case where only a specific (some) reel is like that. In this embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols is set to "4", and when the target symbols are arranged at an interval of 5 symbols or less, "PB = 1", which means that the number of moving symbols exceeds 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When they are arranged at intervals, "PB≠1". In particular, the number of symbols on the reels in this embodiment is set to "20", and if four symbols are arranged at an interval of five symbols, the symbols will be "PB=1".

When the game progresses from "N-1" game, "N" game, "N+1" game, etc. ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When the number is ``N'', the game with the ``N'' game is called the ``current game''. In addition, the "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." On the other hand, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

"Ball payout rate" is a value calculated by the expected value of the number of medals paid out / the number of medals inserted, and when it is "1", the status quo is maintained, and when it exceeds "1", the number of medals increases. When it is less than "1", it is a state where the number of medals decreases. Furthermore, the "expected value of the number of medals to be paid out" is calculated by the sum of "probability of winning the winning combination x number of medals to be paid out" for all the winning combinations to be drawn in the game.

Furthermore, the "difference in number" is a value calculated by "number of medals paid out (number of medals actually paid out or expected number of medals paid out) - number of medals inserted." When the number of medals inserted is "3," if the number of medals paid out (expected value) is "3," the difference in number is "±0," when the number of medals paid out (expected value) exceeds "3," the difference in number exceeds "0," and when the number of medals paid out (expected value) is less than "3," the difference in number is less than "0."

“Bet” refers to betting medals (gaming media) in order to play a game. In this embodiment, when the accessory is not activated (during normal gaming), the number of bets (regular number) that can be played is set to three. On the other hand, while the accessory (1BB) is in operation, the number of bets (regular number) that can be played is set to two. To bet on medals, you either insert the actual medals into the medal slot or operate the bet switch to bet on the stored medals. Note that the "gaming medium" is a medal in this embodiment, but in the case of an enclosed gaming machine, for example, electronic information is used as the gaming medium. Furthermore, "electronic information" refers to, for example, when you insert money (banknotes) into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and some or all of that electronic information can be used to play games on a gaming machine. It can be stored in a gaming machine as gaming media for playing games. In addition, the display of accessory ratios, etc., which will be described later, can be applied not only to slot machines but also to pinball game machines, so "gaming media" includes not only medals but also game balls. It will be done.

Unlike the above-mentioned "bet," "storage" refers to crediting medals inside the slot machine 10. "Reservation" is sometimes used in a meaning that includes a bet, but in this specification, "reservation" is used in a meaning that does not include a "bet." In this embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of coins that can be stored is set to "50" regardless of the gaming state or the like. When a small role is won and medals are paid out, the medals are stored. Furthermore, when medals are inserted from the medal slot and the maximum number has already been bet, the inserted medals are stored. Therefore, when medals are inserted into the medal slot, there are cases where the bet is made and cases where the medals are stored.

Note that the slot machine 10 "paying out" medals to the player and the player "earning" medals are equivalent. Therefore, from the perspective of the slot machine 10, it is "paying out medals", and from the perspective of the player, it is "obtaining medals". For this reason, there are cases where it is referred to as "payout (number of coins)" (for example, the payout means 67) and cases where it is referred to as "acquisition (number of coins)" (for example, the acquisition number display LED 78), but both have the same meaning.

In this specification, a numerical value with "B" appended to the end (especially 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, numbers with "H" at the end mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal notation is written as "00010000 (B)" in binary notation, and "10 (H)" in hexadecimal notation. In addition, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is written as "16 (D)" if necessary. However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, decimal number, or hexadecimal number, the final symbols of "B", "D", and "H" may be omitted, respectively.

Hereinafter, one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like. <First Embodiment> FIG. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing control of a slot machine 10 in this embodiment. Typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10 include a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80. The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (this does not mean that it includes only those shown in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral equipment for playing the game, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection section into which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection section through which signals are sent to peripheral devices such as the motor 32. In FIG. 1, peripheral devices for input are indicated by arrows that direct signals from the peripheral devices toward the main control board 50, and peripheral devices for output are indicated by arrows that direct signals from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game, etc. Data necessary for displaying management information (total number of games, etc.), which will be described later, is stored in the RWM 53. The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for playing the game.

The main CPU 55 refers to the CPU provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game, and more specifically, performs the drawing of winning combinations, drive control of the reels 31, and payouts when a prize is won. The main CPU 55 has built-in registers. In this embodiment, multiple registers (for example, A register to L register, and a transmission register, etc.) are provided.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and registers is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being mounted inside the MPU. An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub control board 80, which will be described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted through the medal slot 43 are sent into the medal selector. As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes (but is not limited to) a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and an input sensor 44, and is electrically connected to a main control board 50. When a medal is inserted through the medal slot 43, it is first detected by the passage sensor 43a.

Further, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for allowing/disallowing the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, forms a medal passageway through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are returned from the payout opening. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal path is formed that guides the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 43 to the hopper 35.

Here, the blocker 45 disables the insertion of medals during the game (from when the reels 31 start rotating until all the reels 31 stop and when a winning combination ends the payout corresponding to the winning combination). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when no game is being played.

Further downstream of the blocker 45, a charging sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided. Therefore, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are configured to be detected by the passage sensor 43a and then further detected by the insertion sensor 44.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, (left, center, right) stop switches 42, and a settlement switch 46 as operation switches operated by the player. connected. The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (the maximum number or a specified number) are provided. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

In addition, the prescribed number of medals in this embodiment is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated and 2 when the accessory is activated, but if the 1 bet switch 40a is operated (pressed) twice, 2 medals will be issued. can be inserted, and by operating (pressing) three times, three medals can be inserted. Furthermore, while the accessory is in operation, by operating the 3-bet switch 40b, it is possible to insert two medals (a specified number) at a time.

The start switch 41 is a switch that the player operates when starting all the reels 31 (left, center, and right). Three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three reels 31 (left, center, and right), and are switches that the player operates when stopping the corresponding reel 31. The settlement switch 46 is a switch that the player operates when paying out medals that have been bet and/or accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Note that, in reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them. Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other with a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (relay board, etc.). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a storage number display LED 76, an advantageous section display LED 77, and an acquired number display LED 78. These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided near the operation switches operated by the player, and are provided at positions where the player can always see them. Note that it is not necessary that all the LEDs 76 to 78 are provided on one display substrate 75; for example, a plurality of display substrates 75 such as display substrates 75A, 75B, . . . are provided, and any one of the display substrates 75 It is sufficient that any one of the LEDs 76 to 78 is provided.

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the stored number display LED 76, advantageous section display LED 77, obtained number display LED 78, settlement switch 46, 1 bet switch 40a, and 3 bet switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. FIG. Further, in FIG. 2, a display board 75 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is arranged inside the slot machine 10 and below the storage number display LED 76, advantageous section display LED 77, and acquisition number display LED 78. ing.

The stored number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of a digit 1 that displays the upper digit and a digit 2 that displays the lower digit. That is, the storage number display LED 76 displays two digits. Here, "digit" means a display section (display), and in particular, in this embodiment, it is composed of a seven segment LED (so-called 7 segments) and a segment DP (decimal point. A dot-shaped LED that displays a decimal point). has been done. As shown in FIG. 2, there are four digits, digits 1 to 4, mounted on the display board 75, but in this embodiment, there are nine digits, and the other digits are mounted on the main control board. 60 (details will be described later).

The stored number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in this embodiment, displays a number between "00" and "50" (integer). For example, in a state where no medals are bet or stored, the stored number display LED 76 displays "00". Here, when one medal is taken care of, that one medal is bet for the game. If two more medals are inserted, three medals are bet for the game (if the specified number is three). Therefore, when up to three medals have been maintained, the medals are betted and not stored. As the medals continue to be taken care of, the medals are stored inside the slot machine 10, and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored medals reaches 50 (when "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), no more medals are stored. In this state, if a medal is cleaned from the medal slot 43, the blocker 45 returns the cleaned medal from the payout slot.

Here, when a winning combination with a medal payout (excluding replays) is won and medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out, the inside of the slot machine 10 is given priority over actually being paid out from the payout port. Medals are saved. For example, when the number of stored coins before winning a winning combination is "10", when a 9-card winning combination is won, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is updated from "10" to "19".

Furthermore, when the number of stored coins exceeds "50" when winning a winning combination, the amount exceeding "50" is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, if the number of stored medals is "47" before winning a winning combination, and 9 medals are paid out by winning a winning combination of 9, 3 medals will be stored and the number of stored medals will be "50", exceeding "50". The 6 pieces are paid out from the payout port.

Furthermore, when winning a prize in a replay, medals are not stored or paid out, and the number of medals that were bet on in the game is automatically bet for the replay. For example, if the game is played with 3 bets (3 medals) and the replay wins, 3 medals are automatically bet. Since automatic bets based on winnings in replays involve inserting medals to play the game again, the medals cannot be settled even if a settlement (return) operation is performed afterwards.

Incidentally, the "Rules for the Certification and Model Inspection of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules")" interprets that when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay stops on a winning line, this is the operation of a condition device related to replay, and is not a "winning move." However, in this application (this specification, etc.), a replay is also treated as one of the roles (replay role), and when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay stops on a winning line, it is referred to as a "winning replay."

Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is constituted by a segment DP of digit 2. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be off during the normal section and standby section, but is controlled to be lit during the advantageous section. Therefore, by checking the lighting/extinguishing state of the advantageous section display LED 77, the player can determine at a glance whether or not he is currently staying in the advantageous section.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is located near the payment switch 46. Therefore, when the player wants to end the game and has accumulated medals (for example, when "10" is displayed on the accumulated number display LED 76), the player operates the settlement switch 46, but at that time, It can be easily confirmed that the vehicle is not in an advantageous section by checking the off state of the advantageous section display LED 77. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to move to an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, in principle, before the payment switch 46 becomes operable. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game against the player's will even though it is in the advantageous period (or in the advantageous period from the next game).

Furthermore, the obtained number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number obtained by the player) when winning a winning combination, and is composed of digit 3 that displays the upper digit and digit 4 that displays the lower digit. ing. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays two digits, similar to the stored number display LED 76. The acquired number display LED 78 displays "00" when there are no medals to be paid out, but for example, when a 9-card combination described later is won and 9 medals are paid out, the acquired number display LED 78 displays: From "00" to "09". Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to turn off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as "0".

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but when an error occurs, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, an error number "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays an advantageous operation mode (press order instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the number of acquisitions display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also serves to display the number of acquisitions, error details, and an advantageous operation mode by operating the instruction function. Note that notification of an advantageous pressing order when the instruction function is activated is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

Here, in this specification, the display of the push order using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50 is referred to as "operation of the instruction function", and the display of the push order by the sub control board 80 is referred to as "notification of the push order". It is called. Further, as shown in FIG. 20, which will be described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous pressing order is referred to as a "pressing order instruction number." Furthermore, information such as "=1" in FIG. 20, which is the push order displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, is referred to as "push order instruction information." That is, by operating the instruction function, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. In FIG. 3, (a) shows example 1, and (b) shows example 2. The main control board 50 is housed in a transparent board case 16 and sealed for security purposes. The main control board 50 cannot be accessed (the board case 16 cannot be unsealed) unless the caulked portion 16a of the board case 16 is destroyed. In FIG. 3, the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is shown so that it can be seen through the board case 16 without being obstructed. Note that the caulked portion 16a may also be referred to as a sealing member.

On the board case 16, stickers are affixed that indicate the authenticity of the main control board 50, the serial number, a record of opening the caulked portion 16a, etc., but these stickers do not obstruct the view. Digits 5 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 so that there is no problem. Digit 5 is a set value display LED 73, which is an LED that displays the current set value when confirming or changing settings. Note that the set value display LED 73 does not necessarily need to be mounted on the main control board 50, and can also be used, for example, on the back side of the front door, or as the storage number display LED 76 or the acquired number display LED 78.

Digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74. To ensure visibility, the management information display LEDs 74 are preferably designed to have a size of, for example, width m1 x height n ≧ 36 square millimeters per digit housing in FIG. 3(a). Alternatively, when the management information display LED 74 is a single horizontally long (width m2) digit housing, it is preferably designed to have a size of width m2 x height n ÷ 4 (number of digits) ≧ 36 square millimeters.

In FIG. 3, in Example 1 of (a), there is one main control board 50, but the main control board 50 is not limited to this, and as in Example 2 of (b), the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards. However, each board may be connected by a harness or the like. However, even if the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards, it is necessary to house the entire board in the board case 16 and seal it. In the example of FIG. 3(b), the main control boards 50 are two main control boards 50A and 50B, and each main control board 50A and 50B is provided with a connector, and the connectors are connected by a harness. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector that can directly connect the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used without using a harness (the same applies to FIG. 42(b) described later). Further, the set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, but the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B also serves as a display board on which the management information display LED 74 is mounted.

Furthermore, the management information display LEDs 74 may be arranged in a single horizontal row as shown in Example 1 (a), or, for example, in Example 2 (b), with digits 6 and 7 arranged in a single row on the top row and digits 8 and 9 arranged in a single row on the bottom row.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9, segments A to G, and segment DP. As mentioned above, each digit is composed of seven bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP, and the segments A to G (seven pieces) constitute the so-called 7 segments. .

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, in digit 1, segments A to G make up the upper 7-segment digits of the LED 76 for displaying the number of saved balls, and segment DP is unused. In addition, in digit 2, segments A to G make up the lower 7-segment digits of the LED 76 for displaying the number of saved balls, and segment DP is used as the LED 77 for displaying the advantageous zone. Furthermore, segments A to G in digits 3 and 4 make up the upper and lower 7-segment digits of the LED 78 for displaying the number of acquired balls, and segment DP is unused.

Further, among the digits 5, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the setting value display LED 73, and the segment DP becomes an LED that lights up during a setting change. That is, when only 7 segments of the set value display LED 73 is lit, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when the 7 segments and segment DP are lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. Note that the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to this usage. For example, the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during a setting change.

Segments 6 to 9 constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 6 and 7 display information types of management information. Furthermore, segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 6 and 7 among the management information. Segment DP of digits 6-9 is unused. However, when lighting the management information display LED 74, it is also possible to light the segment DP of digit 7. Furthermore, by lighting up the segment DP of digit 7, the boundary between digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical value can be made clear and confirmation can be facilitated.

Further, FIG. 4 shows a configuration diagram of segment data. For example, when displaying "0" in digit 1, segments A to F are turned on and segments G and DP are turned off, so the segment data becomes "00111111(B)". Furthermore, when digit 2 is displayed as "1" and the segment is in an advantageous section, segments B, C, and DP are lit, so the segment data becomes "10000110 (B)". That is, by setting the most significant bit (8th bit) of the segment data of digit 2 to "0" or "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or turned on. Thereby, by determining whether the 8th bit of the segment data of digit 2 is "0" or "1", it is possible to determine whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section.

In FIG. 1, the motor 32 of the symbol display device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, motors 32 that drive each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (symbols forming combinations of symbols corresponding to winning combinations) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31. Note that the specific arrangement of symbols on the reels 31 will be described later. Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index (two or more indexes may be used). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has rotated once. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment the index is detected can be detected.

The main control board 50 is also electrically connected to a medal payout device. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when the medals in the hopper 35 are paid out from a payout port, and a payout sensor 37 for detecting the medals paid out from the hopper motor 36.

The medals handled and received from the medal input port 43 are stored in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passageway (also referred to as a "chute section"). The payout sensors 37 are a pair of optical sensors placed apart from each other by a predetermined distance, and are configured such that the medals are detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medals were detected by one payout sensor 37. has been done. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on and off, it is determined whether the medals have been correctly paid out.

For example, if the signals of both payout sensors 37 are off even though the hopper motor 36 is driving, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected. be done. On the other hand, when at least one of the signals from the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

Further, the power switch 11 is a switch that turns on/off the power of the slot machine 10. The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when a setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and rotated 90 degrees to the right (clockwise), and is turned on when confirming settings or changing settings.

The setting switch 13 is a switch operated when changing a setting value. For example, each time the setting is changed, the set value is incremented by "1". In this embodiment, the setting values are from setting 1 to setting 6, and while changing the settings, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the setting value changes from "1" → "2" → ... → "6" → Switches from "1" to... Note that during the setting change, one of the set values is displayed, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed set value is confirmed.

Further, when the reset switch 14 is turned on while the power switch 11 is turned on, a reset or initialization process is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared. Further, the door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when the front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and is used to detect whether the front door is opened or closed.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external centralized terminal board 100 is output from a part of the output port 52. Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external centralized terminal board 100. In this embodiment, an external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous section signal), an external signal indicating an error occurring in the slot machine 10, an external signal indicating the occurrence of a power cut, etc., and an external signal indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 are used. External signals, medal input signals, medal payout signals, etc. are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and while waiting for the game. Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71 to be described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub-control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) necessary for outputting the performance. Note that the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used together.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 is equipped with an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85. Peripheral devices for performance, such as the performance lamps 21 shown in FIG. 1, are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for performance are not limited to these. The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data, etc., that is imported when the sub-CPU 85 controls the performance. In addition, the ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data, etc., for performing lotteries, etc., as performance data.

The performance lamps 21 are, for example, LEDs, and light up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is met. The performance lamps 21 include back lamps that are arranged on the inner circumference of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reels 31 (three consecutive symbols that are visible from the display window 17) from behind, fluorescent lights that illuminate the symbols on the reels 31 from above the reels 31, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and flash when a winning combination is achieved.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when predetermined conditions are met in order to perform various effects during the game. Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effect images (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the lottery results of the condition device, etc.) during the game. It displays game information (such as the number of games played and the number of coins won when the accessory is activated or during an advantageous period). In addition, the cross key 24 and menu button 25 are used to display information intended by the player (including the two-dimensional code that is the player's gaming history), and when the hall manager (manager, etc.) changes various settings. It is used when

Next, the combinations of winning combinations and symbols of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in this embodiment. In FIG. 5, the symbol numbers are also illustrated. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with symbol number 0 is "Bell A". As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame. In addition, in the figure, "blank" does not mean that no symbol is displayed at all, but a predetermined symbol corresponding to "blank" is displayed. Note that "Bell A," "Bell B," and "Bell C" have similar designs in appearance, but are different designs.

Further, FIG. 6(A) shows the positional relationship between the display window (transparent window) 17 provided on the front door (front door, not shown) of the slot machine 10, each reel 31, and the active line (symbol FIG. In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (pieces) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10. Note that the number at the bottom right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

Further, FIG. 6(B) illustrates the names of symbol positions in this specification. In this specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions when stopped visible from the display window 17 are referred to as "upper row," "middle row," and "lower row" in order from the top. ”, “middle left row”, and “lower left row”. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6(A), valid lines are set for nine symbols visible from the display window 17.

Here, the "valid line" is a line where symbols are lined up when the reels 31 are stopped, a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a combination of symbols, and a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a symbol combination when the reels 31 are stopped. This is the line where the winning combination occurs when the combination stops on that line. In this embodiment, one valid line (a straight line passing through "lower left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. There is.

An invalid line is a line that is not set as a valid line among the symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any role stops on that line, a profit will be given according to that role. This is a line where no medals are paid out, etc. That is, an invalid line is a line that is not a target for establishing a combination of symbols in the first place.

Furthermore, slot machines have been known in which the number of active lines varies depending on the number of medals inserted. For example, when the number of medals inserted is 1, the number of active lines is set to 1, when the number of medals inserted is 2, the number of active lines is set to 3, and when the number of medals inserted is 3, the number of active lines is set to 5. Examples include: On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, a game is played by inserting three or two medals, and in all games, one line shown in FIG. 6(A) is the active line. The number of active lines does not change depending on the number of medals inserted. Therefore, in this specification, the term "effective line" refers to the line shown in FIG. 6(A).

FIGS. 7 to 12 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as winning combinations included in a conditional device drawn by a winning lottery means 61 described later), the number of coins to be paid out, and combinations of symbols in this embodiment. In addition, although it is not a winning combination, FIG. 12 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 (numbers ``101'' to ``101'') as combinations of symbols that are displayed when the winning combination is missed when a specific condition device is won. "120").

The roles of this embodiment can be broadly classified into special roles, replays (replayed roles), and small roles. The combination of symbols corresponding to each role and the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped and a combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line (a winning combination is won; the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out. However, the number of coins paid out when winning a special winning combination is set to 0 coins. In addition, in replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

In Figures 7 to 12, the "regular number 3" displayed in the number of coins to be paid out, etc. indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the prescribed number is 3 (when the accessory is not activated, that is, the number of coins inserted during normal play). , "Regulated number 2" indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the prescribed number is 2 (the number of coins inserted when the accessory is activated, that is, during the special game). For example, Replay 01 with the number "3" indicates that a replay will occur if the specified number of tickets is 3, and a "-" with the specified number of 2 tickets indicates that the lottery will not be drawn.

In FIG. 7, numbers "1" and "2" correspond to special prizes (accessories). In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special winning combination, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB). A special winning combination is a winning combination that allows a transition from a normal game to a special game. If you win a 1BB, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the next game will shift to a 1BB game corresponding to a special game (operation of accessory). During the 1BB game (when the accessory is activated), the payout rate is set to exceed "1", so it is an advantageous game for the player, as the player can expect to win more medals than when the accessory is not activated. .

Furthermore, a replay (replay winning combination) is a winning combination that allows a player to play the game again while maintaining the number of medals inserted in the current game (automatically bet medals). As shown in FIG. 7, the replays of this embodiment include replays 01 to 06 (numbers "3" to "13"). Replays 02 and 03 are replays in which when a player wins at a specific RT, the player is transferred to another RT. These replays are therefore also referred to as transition replays.

More specifically, when Replay 02 wins in RT2, the next game is shifted to RT3 (RT advantageous to the player). Therefore, replay 02 is also referred to as promoted replay. Furthermore, when Replay 03 wins in RT3, the next game is shifted to RT2 (RT which is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RTs). Therefore, replay 03 is also referred to as a fall (demotion) replay.

In addition, replays 04 and 05 are first used as control replays for the purpose of increasing the types of condition devices by winning multiple replays multiple times, and in this embodiment, among the condition devices described later, This is a replay included in replay B2, B3, C2, C3, or E. When replay B2, B3, C2, or C3 is won, replay 04 or 05 as a control replay will not stop at the active line.

Furthermore, replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rare replays and are included in replay E of the conditional device, which will be described later. When replay E is won during an advantageous section, addition of the advantageous section is carried out. Note that the additional lottery may be performed instead of always performing the additional lottery. Moreover, Replay 06 is a replay that is drawn during the 1BB operation, and is included in Replay D of the conditional device described later. When replay D is won during an advantageous section, addition of the advantageous section is carried out. Note that the additional lottery may be performed instead of always performing the additional lottery.

Further, the small winnings include small winnings 01 to 40 (numbers "14" to "100") as shown in FIGS. 7 to 11. Small winning combinations 01 and 02 are small winning combinations (small winning combinations corresponding to higher bells) that are won in the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won, which will be described later. Further, small winnings 03 to 34 are small winnings (small winnings corresponding to the standard bell) that can be won (PB≠1) when the pushing order bell is won and the winning order is incorrectly pressed. Furthermore, small winnings 35 to 38 are rare small winnings (small winnings corresponding to watermelon or cherry). Furthermore, the small winnings 39 and 40 are small winnings that have a specified number of two pieces, that is, they can be won only when the accessory is activated.

As mentioned above, pattern symbols 01 to 03 are not the winning combinations themselves, but they appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the pressing order is incorrect when the pressing order bell is won. It is a combination of designs. Furthermore, the pattern symbol is a symbol that causes the RT to shift (transfers to RT2 in this embodiment) when the combination of symbols stops on an active line at a specific RT (non-RT, RT1, or RT3 in this embodiment). It's a combination. In this embodiment, pattern symbols 01 to 03 are made to appear without fail when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small combination B group. However, other symbol combinations (not the winning combinations themselves) may also appear.

For each of the above-mentioned roles, if the combination of symbols corresponding to that role does not stop on the active line in a game in which a winning role is won, the roles that will be carried over to the next game and those that will not be carried over are determined. . The hand carried over is 1BB in this embodiment. When 1BB is won, the winning information of 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later in the game until 1BB is won.

On the other hand, winnings of 1BB are carried over, whereas small winnings other than 1BB and replays are not carried over. When a small winning combination or a replay is won in the lottery using the conditional device, the winning winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in games where these winning combinations are won, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combinations can win, but regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won, at the end of the game, , the rights related to that winning role shall be extinguished.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet) or inserts medals from the medal slot 43 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a prescribed number of medals bet, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, it performs a winning lottery by the winning winning lottery means 61, drives and controls all the motors 32, and controls all the reels. 31 is controlled to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

Then, the player presses a stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described below) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to that stop switch 42, and performs stop control of the reel 31 related to that motor 32 so as to correspond to the role selection result of the role selection means 61.

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed based on the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when a combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line (when that winning combination is achieved), medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role selection means 61 selects (determines, selects) the condition device (winning role). Therefore, the role selection means 61 is also referred to as the condition device determination (selection or selection) means, the winning role determination (selection or selection) means, etc. In addition, the "winning of the condition device" is also referred to as the role selection result, the lottery result, the winning number, the winning result, etc.

The winning lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means for lottery (hardware random numbers, etc.), a random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number extracting means based on the random number extracted by the random number extracting means. The apparatus includes determining means for determining whether or not a conditional device has been won, and determining the winning conditional device.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal notation). The random number is a random number that continues counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle by a counter that counts once every 200n (nano) seconds, for example, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number is Continue counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, which in this embodiment is when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means compares the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with the condition device lottery table described below, and determines the condition device corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs. For example, if the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device number "1" (Replay A), it determines that Replay A has been won.

13 to 16 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices drawn by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combination included in each condition device. In the following explanation, the explanation will mainly be on the conditional device, and the details of the stop control of the reels 31 based on the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42 when each conditional device is won will be explained in terms of the reel control means 65. do.

As mentioned above, the condition device of this embodiment is a "accessory condition device" which is a condition device that includes one of the special combinations that can carry winning information to the next game, and a condition device that does not carry winning information to the next game. It consists of a "winning and replay condition device" which is a condition device that includes either a small winning combination or a replay. In this embodiment, the winning of the accessory condition device corresponds to the winning of 1BB, and includes accessory condition device numbers “1” and “2”. The accessory condition device number "0" corresponds to not winning the special prize, the accessory condition device number "1" corresponds to winning 1BBA, and the accessory condition device number "2" corresponds to winning 1BBB. Equivalent to.

Further, for example, when replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is "0" and the winning and replay condition device number is "1". On the other hand, when winning 1BBA alone, the accessory condition device number is "1" and the winning and replay condition device number is "0".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are cases where 1BB and a small win are overlapping wins. For example, when 1BBA and a small win D are overlapping wins, the device number for the device condition is "1" and the winning and replay condition device number is "26". When 1BB and a small win or a replay are overlapping wins, the winning of the small win or replay is given priority in the current game (the priority order can be set arbitrarily). Also, since the winning of a small win or a replay is only valid in the current game, the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information for 1BB is carried over to the next game unless a win is achieved.

The winning and replay condition devices will be explained below. Condition device number "0" corresponds to non-winning of the winning combination (so-called loss). Furthermore, replay A with conditional device number "1" is a single win of replay 01. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 is won regardless of the order in which the keys are pressed (in any order).

Replays B1 to B3 of condition device numbers “2” to “4” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “Replay B group”), replays C1 to C3 of condition device numbers “5” to “7” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “Replay B group”) (hereinafter referred to as "Replay C group") are all duplicate wins of multiple types of replays, and are duplicate wins including at least one of Replays 01 and 02. The types of winning replays are set to differ depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed. For example, in Replay B1 with the condition device number "2", Replay 02 wins in the pressing order of the left first stop, and Replay 01 wins in a case other than the left first stop (middle or right first stop).

Note that in the case of replay multiple winnings, the replay (replay combination) wins regardless of the order in which the keys are pressed, so there is no concept of higher or lower bids regarding medal payouts, etc. However, for example, when Replay B1 is won in RT2, RT is promoted (transferred from RT2 to RT3) by winning Replay 02 at the first left stop. On the other hand, at times other than the first stop on the left, RT2 is maintained by winning Replay 01. Further, when replay C1 is won in RT3, RT3 is maintained by winning replay 01 at the first left stop. On the other hand, at other than the first stop on the left, RT is dropped (demoted) (transferred from RT3 to RT2) by winning Replay 03.

Replay D with conditional device number “8” is a single win of Replay 06. When Replay D is won, Replay 06 is won regardless of the order of the presses. Similarly, replay E with conditional device number "9" is a duplicate win of replays 04 and 05. When Replay E is won, Replay 04 or 05 will win regardless of the order in which they are pressed. These replays 04 and 05 serve as rare replays. Particularly in this embodiment, if the lottery is drawn in RT1 and you win Replay E during RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section will be added. Note that the additional lottery may be performed instead of always performing the additional lottery.

In FIG. 14, the small winning combination A with the condition device number "10" is played on a so-called common bell, and the small winning combination 01 is won alone. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 is always won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed (PB=1). In addition, in FIGS. 14 to 15, small winning combinations B1 to B12 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small winning B group") with condition device numbers "11" to "22" correspond to so-called push order bells. , is a multiple winning that includes at least one of the minor winning combinations 01 (9-card bell, 9-card winning combination) and the minor winning combinations 03 to 34 (1-card winning combination).

When these conditional devices are selected, depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, if the correct order is selected, "PB=1" will result in the small prize 01, which is a high-value bell (9-coin bell, 9-coin prize). On the other hand, if the order is incorrect, depending on the timing of the operation of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated), the small prize 03-34, which is a low-value bell (1-coin prize), may be won, or none of the small prizes may be won (a pattern symbol is displayed due to a missed win).

In FIG. 16, the small roles C1 to C3 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small role C group") with condition device numbers "23" to "25" correspond to so-called push order bells, as with the above-mentioned small role B group, and are overlapping wins including small role 02 (3-coin bell, 3-coin role) and small roles 03 to 10 (1-coin role). When these condition devices are won, depending on the push order of the stop switch 42, if the push order is correct, "PB = 1" will be won and small role 02, which is a high-coin bell (3-coin bell, 3-coin role), will be won. On the other hand, if the push order is incorrect, "PB = 1" will be won and one of the small roles 03 to 10, which is a low-coin bell (1-coin role), will be won. Therefore, unlike the win of the small role B group, when the small role C group is won, there is no case where a pattern design is displayed (missed win). However, this is not limited to this, and there may be a case where none of the small roles are won.

When winning the small role B group, if the high bell wins, 9 pieces will be paid out, so if the pressing order is correct, there will be 3 pieces in (number of pieces put in) and 9 pieces out (number of pieces paid out), which is the difference in this game. The number of sheets will be "+6 sheets". Therefore, when the pressing order is correct, the number of medals increases, and when the pressing order is incorrect (the number of medals paid out is 1 or 0), the number of medals decreases. On the other hand, in the small role C group, when a high bell is won, 3 pieces will be paid out, so if the push order is correct, there will be 3 pieces in (number of pieces put in) and 3 pieces out (number of pieces paid out), and in this game The difference in the number of sheets is "±0 sheets". Therefore, when the pressing order is correct, the number of medals remains the same, and when the pressing order is incorrect (the number of medals paid out is 1), the number of medals decreases.

The reason for providing both the push order bell that pays out 9 coins and the push order bell that pays out 3 coins when the correct answer is pressed is to adjust the payout rate. In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small winning group B, the probability of winning a 1-card winning combination is 25%, and the other 75% are pattern symbols. is set to be displayed (no payout when pattern symbols are displayed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when the pressing order is incorrect when the small winning combination C group is won, a one-card winning combination is made with "PB=1". In this way, by providing two types of push order bells that pay out different numbers depending on whether the push order is correct or incorrect, and by setting the winning probability appropriately, it is possible to set the ball payout rate within an appropriate range. become.

The small win D with the condition device number "26" corresponds to a rare small win (watermelon). Small win D is a single win of small win 35, and is set to "PB ≠ 1". In addition, small win E1 with the condition device number "27" and small win E2 with the condition device number "28" correspond to a rare small win (cherry), just like the above small win D1. Small win E1 is a double win of small wins 36 and 38, and small win E2 is a double win that includes small win 37 in addition to the above small wins 36 and 38. When small win E1 or E2 is won, a 2-coin win (small win 36 or 38) will be awarded regardless of the order in which the buttons are pressed.

The small win F with the condition device number "29" is a win that is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a duplicate win of small wins 01 to 39. When the small winning combination F is won, the small winning combination 39, which is a 10-card winning combination, wins with "PB=1". The small win G with the condition device number "30" is a win that is drawn only during the 1BB operation (during the 1BB game), and is a single win of the small win 40. When the small winning combination G is won, the small winning combination 40, which is a 9-card winning combination, is won with "PB=1".

FIGS. 17 and 18 show the winning probability determined by the lottery table when the lottery of condition devices is performed by the prize lottery means 61, and shows the number of bonus condition devices and winning and replay condition devices for each RT. It is a diagram. Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 by "65536" gives the probability of winning. For example, the numbers for single winning of 1BBA are set to "20" and "10" (total "30") for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the individual winning probability of 1BBA is "30/65536".

FIG. 17 is a table showing the number of condition devices that have common settings and can decide to move to an advantageous section, or can perform an addition to an advantageous section (or can perform an additional lottery). Here, "setting common" means that there is no setting difference, that is, setting 1 to setting 6 have the same value. When you win a condition device with common settings, you may always decide to move to the advantageous section (determine to add on during the advantageous section), or you may decide whether to move to the advantageous section or not ( During the advantageous section, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to add on the bonus. Alternatively, a conditional device that determines to move to an advantageous section (determines to add an additional amount during an advantageous section) and a conditional device that decides not to transfer to an advantageous section (determines not to add an additional amount during an advantageous section). It may be provided.

In this embodiment, the common setting condition device shown in FIG. 17 includes a condition device that determines to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device that determines not to shift to the advantageous section. Furthermore, during an advantageous section, a condition device is set that determines that the advantageous section is always added. In FIG. 17, in the normal section, "○" means that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and "x" means that it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. Further, in the advantageous section, "△" means that it is decided to add the advantageous section, and "x" means that it is decided not to add the advantageous section. In addition, in FIG. 17, "○" indicates that it is decided to move to an advantageous section, and "△" indicates that it is decided that an advantageous section will be added, but the "○" is not limited to this. It means to draw a lottery to determine whether to move to an advantageous section, and "△" may mean to draw a lottery to determine whether to add an advantageous section.

Further, FIG. 18 shows the conditional devices and the number of conditional devices in which it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section or to add the advantageous section. In this embodiment, the condition device that determines to move to an advantageous section or to add an advantageous section is limited to when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won, and the condition device shown in FIG. In all cases of winning, it is not decided to move to the advantageous section, nor is it decided to add the advantageous section. Note that although FIG. 18 representatively shows the setting numbers of setting 1 and setting 6, in reality, as described above, the setting value has six stages from setting 1 to setting 6, and The number of positions for each value is determined.

In Figures 17 and 18, the condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB is drawn only in non-internal areas, and is therefore drawn in non-RT, RT1 to RT3. Also, 1BBA and 1BBB may win alone or may win together with small role D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, small role D, E1 or E2 may win alone. The condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB drawn in RT4 is treated as small role D, E1 or E2 winning alone. Therefore, the total number of places that result in a single win for small role D in RT4 is between "580" and "585", the total number of places that result in a single win for small role E1 in RT4 is "1030", and the total number of places that result in a single win for small role E2 in RT4 is "310" to "370". In addition, 1BBB is set as the winning role when a condition device with a setting difference wins, and it is not determined to move to a favorable zone or to add to the favorable zone based on the winning of 1BBB.

Moreover, Replay D is drawn only during 1BB operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only in RT1. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1. Then, if you win Replay E in this RT1, an advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set it so that it does not appear in other RTs, Replay E is selected by lottery only in RT1. Furthermore, the small winning combinations D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is not activated, and are not drawn when the accessory is activated. On the other hand, small winning combinations F and G are not drawn when the accessory is not activated, but are drawn only when the accessory is activated.

In addition, in FIG. 17, the total number of individual winnings of 1BBA is "30", but in this embodiment, the number "20" determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the number "20" determined to move to the advantageous section in the normal section It is divided into a number "10" which determines not to migrate. That is, in the case where 1BBA is won alone, if the number "20" is won, and the game is in the normal section, the advantageous section will be won at the same time. On the other hand, in the case where 1BBA wins alone, if the number "10" is won, the advantageous section will not be won.

Furthermore, when a single winner of 1BBA is won during the advantageous section, it is decided that the advantageous section will be added to whether the number is "20" or "10". Similarly, the total number of winnings for the small winning combination E1 is "1000", but in this embodiment, the number "250" that determines the transition to the advantageous section in the normal section and the number "250" that determines the transition to the advantageous section in the normal section It is divided into ``750'' and ``750,'' which determines that the transition will not be made.

However, this is not limited to this, and when the individual winning number of the small winning combination E1 is set as one winning number "1000" (not divided into the number "250" and the number "750"), and winning the small winning combination E1. Alternatively, a separate lottery may be used to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section. For example, it may be decided to move to the advantageous section with a probability of 25%, and not decided to transfer to the advantageous section with a probability of 75%. In this way, it is possible to set a number that wins in the advantageous section from the beginning and a number that does not win in the advantageous section, but the number itself is one value, and when the number wins, it moves to the advantageous section. A lottery (two-stage lottery) may be performed to decide whether or not to do so. Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, at RT4 (internal), there is no case where it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and there is no case where the advantageous section is added. Therefore, even if you win small prize D or E1, if it is RT4, it will not be decided to move to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section will not be added ("*3" in Fig. 17). .

In FIG. 18, when 1BBB wins alone and 1BBB and small role D win multiple times, no determination is made regarding the advantageous section. However, as will be described later, an opportunity to add an advantageous section will be provided after the operation of 1BBB is completed (after transition to RT1). Minor winning combination E2 has a case where it is won in duplicate with 1BBB and a case where it is won alone, but in both cases, no determination is made regarding the advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won, a decision regarding the advantageous section may be made in both the single winning of the small winning combination E1 and the multiple winning with 1BBA.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18, the condition devices for Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group have the same settings, but do not decide to shift to an advantageous section, and add on during the advantageous section. I don't really make a decision. However, this is not limited to the examples in FIGS. 17 and 18. When these replay condition devices are won, it may be decided to move to an advantageous section (including a lottery) or it may be decided to add an advantageous section (including a lottery). ) may be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group, the setting numbers are slightly different between Setting 1 and Setting 6 (for example, by "1"), and Replay A, Replay B group, And the replay C group may be set separately.

In FIG. 18, Replay A is drawn at all RTs when the accessory is not activated. Furthermore, the replay B1 group is drawn only in RT2. Furthermore, the replay C group is drawn only in RT3. Although the small winning combination A, small winning combination B group, and small winning combination C group all have a setting difference between setting 1 and setting 6, the numbers placed are the same in all RTs.

Moreover, as shown in the table of "Special Win and Minor Win" in FIG. 18, between Setting 1 and Setting 6, Setting 6 has a higher probability of winning the 1BB and Minor Win. Therefore, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1 in this respect. Furthermore, as shown in the "Replay" table, RT3 has the highest replay winning probability. In the advantageous section, it is basically set to stay at RT3, so the number of medals is not only increased by operating the instruction function when the push order bell is won, but also the number of medals decreases less due to replay winnings. .

Moreover, the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group are all set to condition devices having different settings. Here, the difference in number between setting 1 and setting 6 for small role A is "250", and the difference in number between setting 1 and setting 6 for small role B group (overall) is "240 (20 x 12)". ”. Therefore, the small winning combination A has a larger difference in number than the small winning combination B group. Thereby, by setting the number of small winning combinations A that do not have a winning difference depending on the pressing order to a larger value, it is possible to reliably provide a difference in the ball payout rate according to the set value. In addition, the combination of symbols that can be won when winning small role A and the combination of symbols that can be won when the press order is correct when winning small role B group are set to be the same (described later). It is not possible to estimate the setting value by counting the number of wins (prizes).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small winning combination B group is set higher than the probability of winning the small winning combination C group. Here, when the specified number is 3, the maximum payout number is 9, and during the advantageous period, at least 1 instruction function activation game where the payout number is 9 (maximum payout number with the specified number of 3). need to be executed once. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once when winning the small winning combination B group. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small role B group higher than the winning probability of the small role C group, it is possible to win the instruction function activation game (small role C group, replay B group, replay C group) once. It is possible to reduce the expected value of the number of games played in an advantageous section that ends only in games (excluding games played). Furthermore, even though the advantageous section ends after playing a predetermined number of games, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the advantageous section cannot be completed because the player has not won the small winning group B even once during the predetermined number of games. be able to.

The explanation returns to FIG. 1. The winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When any of the conditional devices is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the winning combination included in that conditional device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

For example, in a non-internal medium game, when replay B1 is won, two winning flags, replay 01 and replay 02, included in the condition device are turned on, and winning flags for other combinations are turned off. Similarly, in a non-internal medium game, when winning the small win B1, the small win 01, the small win 03, the small win 10, the small win 11, the small win 18, the small win 19, and the small win included in the conditional device are selected. Seven winning flags for winning combination 26 are turned on, and winning flags for other winning combinations are turned off.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, winnings of minor prizes other than 1BB and replays are not carried over, so even if you win a minor prize or replay in this game and the winning flags for these prizes are turned on, the winnings of the minor prizes and replays other than 1BB will not be carried over. Sometimes the winning flag is turned off. On the other hand, the winning of 1BB is carried over, so if you win 1BB in this game and the winning flag for the won 1BB is turned on, it will remain on until that 1BB wins, and It will be turned off when 1BB is won.

Also, for example, when 1BBA and minor role D are won twice in the role lottery means 61, the winning flag of the minor role 35 corresponding to 1BBA and minor role D is turned on, and there is no case where both roles win in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA does not win, the winning flag for 1BBA remains on and the winning flag for minor winning combination 35 turns off, regardless of whether the small winning combination 35 wins or not.

Furthermore, for example, when 1BBA is won alone in the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of 1BBA is turned on in the current game, and when 1BBA is not won in the current game, the winning flag of 1BBA remains on. . Furthermore, when you win the small role A1 in the next game, in addition to 1BBA which carries over the winning, the winning flag for the small role 01 will be turned on, and if 1BBA is not won at the end of the current game, 1BBA will be turned on. The winning flag of is kept on, and the winning flag of small winning combination 01 is turned off.

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination lottery means 61. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a push order instruction number table. Note that the push order instruction number selection means 63 may select the push order instruction number in either the advantageous section or the normal section, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, only during the advantageous section. The pressing order instruction number may be selected. In such a case, the push order instruction number will always be "A0" during the normal section. Further, the selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section (excluding sending the push order instruction number "A0" during the normal section). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device has its own unique push order instruction number. For example, the push order instruction number corresponding to replay A is "A0", and the push order instruction number corresponding to replay C3 is "A3". The push order instruction numbers include "A0" to "A3".

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the push order instruction number, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number, and display contents 1 and 2. The push order instruction number "A0" does not have a push order that is advantageous to the player (there is no advantage/disadvantage depending on the push order, that is, the push order does not matter). Furthermore, the push order instruction numbers "A1" to "A3" each have a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, the advantageous push order corresponding to push order instruction number "A2" is middle first stop.

The push order corresponding to the push order instruction numbers in the Replay B group is set to a push order that will result in Replay 02 winning (a push order that will promote RT). Also, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction numbers in the Replay C group is set to a push order that will result in Replay 01 winning (maintaining RT). Similarly, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction numbers in the Small Winning Group B is set to a push order that will result in Small Winning 01 (9 coins). Also, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction numbers in the Small Winning Group C is set to a push order that will result in Small Winning 02 (3 coins).

In addition, in FIG. 20, "Display Content 1" indicates the content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50), and in this embodiment, indicates the push order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this embodiment, the push order instruction numbers "A" and "0" to "3" correspond to the LED (7-segment) displays of "=" and "0" to "3", respectively. When "=" is displayed, segments D and G of the 7-segment display in FIG. 4 are lit up (see FIG. 26 described below). Also, when the push order instruction number is "A0", no display (no segments are lit up) is acceptable.

Furthermore, "display content 2" indicates the content displayed under the control of the sub-control board 80, and in this embodiment, is the correct answer pressing order displayed on the image display device 23. Note that "activation of the instruction function" means a display using the acquisition number display LED 78 by the main control board 50, and a display under the control of the sub-control board 80 is included in the "operation of the instruction function" of the present invention. is not included. For example, when winning the winning and replay condition device "11" during the advantageous section, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected, and the number of wins display LED 78 displays "=1" due to the operation of the instruction function. Ru. Further, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "1○○" that allows the player to understand that the first stop is on the left.

In FIG. 19, the push order instruction number (*1) when winning the small winning combination A is as follows. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 is won regardless of the order in which the keys are pressed, so there is no advantageous pressing order. However, during the advantageous section, one of "A1" to "A3" is selected as the dummy push order instruction number. The selection rate is "1/3" for each. By setting in this way, when the small winning combination A is won during the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the push order instruction information is displayed. As a result, in the game, the player cannot determine whether he has won the small winning combination A or the small winning combination B group. The reason for setting this way is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning (number of places) for small win A is higher for setting 6 than for setting 1. Therefore, by counting the number of times that small win 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is not activated during the advantageous zone, it is possible to guess the set value. In order to avoid such an attack, when small win A is won during the advantageous zone, the instruction function is activated and dummy push order instruction information is displayed. Of course, it is not impossible to guess the set value by counting the number of times that small win 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is activated, but more attempts are required than when guessing the set value by counting the number of times that small win 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is not activated.

Furthermore, in FIG. 19, the push order instruction information (*2) when winning small winning combinations E1 and E2 is as follows. As shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. However, as mentioned above, if you win 1BB during the advantageous period and it becomes inside, the advantageous period will not be added. Therefore, during the advantageous section and inside (during the game section where no addition is made in the advantageous section), you can win the small winning combination E1, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination E1 (the combination of symbols that makes you expect to add on the advantageous section). If a certain middle-tier cherry stops, there is a risk of giving the player the impression that he or she has made a wasted draw. Therefore, when winning the small winning combination E1 during the advantageous section and inside, the push order instruction number "A3" is selected, the instruction function is activated, and "Right first stop" is displayed.

When the stop switch 42 is operated at the right first stop when winning the small winning combination E1, the so-called middle cherry does not stop, as shown in FIG. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small winning combination E1. Furthermore, since the number of coins to be paid out for each of the minor prizes 36 and 38 that can be won when the minor prize E1 is won is two, even if the right first stop is instructed, the player will not be disadvantaged.

Furthermore, as described above, the advantageous zone has an upper limit on the number of plays, which is set within 1500 games in this embodiment. Therefore, even if there are remaining plays in the advantageous zone, when the number of plays from the start of the advantageous zone reaches 1500 games, the advantageous zone is forced to end unconditionally. In a case with such playability, for example, if the small role E1 is won when approaching 1500 games in the advantageous zone and a middle cherry is displayed, the player will expect the advantageous zone to be extended. Therefore, in this embodiment, after 1400 games or more have passed since the start of the advantageous zone, the instruction function is activated to display the right first stop in order to prevent the middle cherry from being displayed, as in the case of a win inside, even if the small role E1 is won.

In addition, when the small winning combination E2 is won, as shown in FIG. 18, no determination is made regarding the advantageous section. However, when the small winning combination E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, a middle cherry may be displayed. Therefore, if the middle cherry is displayed when 1400 games or more have been played since the start of the internal or advantageous section, there is a risk of misleading the player, so the instruction function is activated in this case as well. , display the first stop on the right. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since the advantageous section is not determined in the first place when the small winning combination E2 is won, the middle cherry may be displayed without operating the instruction function as described above.

In FIG. 1, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning condition device, which is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result of the lottery for the condition device, it is also possible to transmit the winning prize and replay condition device number itself to the sub-control board 80. However, in this embodiment, the winning prize and replay condition device number itself is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 is unable to know the winning prize and replay condition device number that have been won in the current game.

On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, a performance group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined in advance. After the conditional device is drawn, a presentation group number corresponding to the winning conditional device is selected and the presentation group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the performance group number selected in the current game, it becomes possible to select and output the performance corresponding to the performance group number.

21 is a diagram showing a performance group number table. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each condition device has a unique performance group number. For example, the performance group number corresponding to the winning of small role A, small role B group, and small role C group is set to "5". The performance group numbers corresponding to the winning of small role A, small role B group, and small role C group may be different, such as "5", "6", and "7".

Therefore, the main control board 50 selects "5" as the presentation group number when the small winning combination A, small winning group B, or small winning group C is won as a result of the lottery of the conditional device. Then, information on the selected effect group number "5" is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the information that the production group number is "5", it can know that in this game, it has won one of the small prize A, small prize B group, or small prize C group. can. Thereby, it is possible to output a winning performance of the bell.

However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information that the performance group number "5" has been won, even if the game has won one of the small winning groups B, the sub-control board 80 cannot press the correct answer button. You can't know the order. In this embodiment, the push order instruction number corresponding to the correct push order is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous section, but not during the normal section or standby section. Therefore, during the advantageous period, the sub-control board 80 can output the fact that the small winning combination A, the small winning group B group, or the small winning combination C group has been won and the correct pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number as an effect. can. On the other hand, during the normal section or standby section, the sub-control board 80 only displays the effect that one of the small winning combinations A, B group, or C group (bell) has been won, and the order in which the correct answer is pressed is cannot be output as a performance.

Further, even if the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, different effects can be output because the effect group numbers are different. For example, when winning Replay B1, the push order instruction number is "A1" (first on the left), and when winning small role C1, the push order instruction number is "A1" (first on the left). In both cases, the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

However, when replay B1 is won, effect group number "2" is transmitted, and when minor win C1 is won, effect group number "5" is transmitted. Therefore, when effect group number "2" is transmitted, it is possible to announce the correct button press sequence using, for example, blue, which indicates a replay, and when effect group number "5" is transmitted, it is possible to announce the correct button press sequence using, for example, yellow, which indicates a bell.

In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 starts the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when the start switch 41 in this embodiment is operated. control. Further, after the lottery of the condition device is performed by the winning combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the winning flag in the current game, and generates a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the winning flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is driven. The reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

For example, in a game where at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 controls the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the winning flag is on) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so as to be able to stop on the active line, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that symbol combinations corresponding to roles other than winning combinations (winning flags are turned off) are not stopped on the active line. .

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reels 31" refers to the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 actually stop, or the amount of rotation of the reels 31 (number of moving pieces (symbols)). means within range. In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 revolutions per minute at constant speed. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the maximum number of frames that can be moved from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 frames.

For example, in FIG. 5, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the number 1 "REPLAY" on the left reel 31 is located at the lower left row (on the active line), the "replay" number 1 on the left reel 31 is moved four frames ahead, that is, the number 5 "REPLAY" is located at the lower left row (on the active line). The symbols up to "B" can be stopped on the lower left row. Therefore, at the above-mentioned operation timing, the symbols No. 1 (bit stop) to No. 5 (four-frame veri) become the symbols that can be stopped at the lower left row.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to set the maximum number of frames to be moved to 4 frames from the symbol next to the symbol located on the active line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the No. 1 "Replay" on the left reel 31 is located at the lower left row, the next symbol, that is, the No. 2 "Blank", will be moved. The symbols four frames ahead, up to No. 6 "Replay", are symbols that can be stopped in the lower left row. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols No. 2 to No. 6 become symbols that can be stopped at the lower left row. In the following explanation, the maximum number of frames to be moved from the symbol located on the active line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is assumed to be four frames.

First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of stop control of the reels 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined active line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined active line.

In other words, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and the symbol associated with the winning combination does not stop on the specified effective line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the range of the reel 31's stop control until the reel 31 is stopped, so that the symbol associated with the winning combination stops on the specified effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, the combination of symbols corresponding to non-winning combinations will stop on the active line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control of 31, the combination of symbols corresponding to non-winning combinations is controlled so as not to stop on the active line (kick-off stop control). Furthermore, in a game where multiple winning combinations are won, the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed and the timing of operating the stop switches 42. According to the predetermined priority order, Performs retraction stop control for the most prioritized symbol.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed (operation order). The reel control means 65 detects which of the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated by the player. When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 65. By determining this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, control to stop the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

Further, the reel control means 65 includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table determines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the number 1 symbol (“replay” in the case of the left reel 31) passes the lower left stage (on the active line), The stopping position is determined in advance, such as by controlling the movement of only the symbols (how many frames) and stopping the numbered symbol at the lower left row.

Here, the symbol arrangement in this embodiment will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 5, on all reels 31, four "replays" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the "replays" on all reels 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration. Similarly, on the left reel 31, four of either "Bell A" or "Bell B" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the combination of these two symbols is arranged in a "PB=1" configuration. Furthermore, on the center reel 31, four "Bell C" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the "Bell C" on the center reel 31 is arranged in a "PB=1" configuration. Furthermore, on the right reel 31, four of either "Bell A" or "Bell B" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the combination of these two symbols is arranged in a "PB=1" configuration.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, four "cherries" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “Cherry” on the right reel 31 is placed in “PB=1”. Furthermore, on the left reel 31, four pieces of either "Black 7" or "Watermelon" are arranged at an interval of five symbols. As a result, the total arrangement of these two symbols is "PB=1". Similarly, on the middle reel 31, four of either "Blue 7" or "Cherry" are arranged at an interval of five symbols. As a result, the total arrangement of these two symbols is "PB=1". Similarly, on the right reel 31, four of any one of "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Blank", or "Red 7" are arranged at an interval of five symbols. As a result, the total arrangement of these four symbols is "PB=1".

On the other hand, on the left reel 31, "Cherry" is placed at No. 3, No. 8, and No. 13, so it is not placed in "PB=1". Similarly, for "Watermelon", the left and middle reels 31 have a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the right reel 31 has a "PB=1" arrangement.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be explained based on FIGS. 13 to 16 described above. First, the stop position determination table when the winning and replay condition device is won will be explained. The non-winning table is used in a game when a winning combination is not won, and the combination of symbols when the reels 31 are stopped is determined so that the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on the active line.

The Replay A table is used when Replay A is won (Replay 01 wins alone), and is set so that Replay 01 is stopped on the active line within the range of stop control of the reels 31, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed. 31 stop positions are determined. The symbols on each reel 31 relating to Replay 01 and Replays 02 to 06 to be described later are arranged in “PB=1” on all reels 31. Therefore, when a replay is won, the winning replay always wins (if multiple replays win multiple times, one of the multiple replays wins).

The Replay B1 table is used in the game when Replay B1 is won, and within the range of stop control of the reels 31, when the left first stop (when the pressing order is correct), Replay 02 is stopped at the active line, and the left first stop is used. At times other than time (when the push order is incorrect), the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line (see FIG. 13).

First, in a game using the Replay B1 table, when the first left stop occurs, a "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped in the bottom left row (PB=1 as described above). In this case, a "Replay" is stopped in the top left row. Next, when the second center stop occurs, a "Replay" is stopped in the middle center row. Then, when the third right stop occurs, a "Cherry" is stopped in the top right row. In this case, a "Replay" is stopped in the bottom right row. As a result, a "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Replay"-"Cherry" are stopped on the active line, resulting in Replay 02.
Furthermore, "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay" will stop on the "top left" - "middle middle" - "bottom right" lines.

On the other hand, in a game using the replay B1 table, at the first stop in the middle, "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is stopped in the middle middle row ("PB=1"). In this case, the "replay" will stop in the middle upper row. Thereafter, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped on the lower left row ("PB=1"). At this time, as described above, the "replay" is stopped in the upper left row. Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, "replay" is stopped in the upper right row ("PB=1"). As a result, "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Blue 7/Cherry" - "Replay" is stopped on the active line, and Replay 01 becomes a winning prize. Further, "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay" is stopped at "upper left row" - "upper middle row" - "upper right row".

In a game where the replay B1 table is used, the control is the same at the first stop on the right as when the first stop is in the middle. Furthermore, the Replay B2 table when Replay B2 is won and the Replay B3 table when Replay B3 is won are controlled in the same manner as described above, so that Replay 02 is won when the pressing order is correct, and Replay 01 is won when the pressing order is incorrect.

The Replay C1 table is used in play when Replay C1 is won, and determines the stopping position of reel 31 so that, within the range of reel 31 stopping control, Replay 01 stops on an active line when the reel stops first on the left (when the button press sequence is correct), and Replay 03 stops on an active line other than when the reel stops first on the left (when the button press sequence is incorrect) (see Figure 13).

First, in a game using the Replay C1 table, the control for stopping Replay 01 on the active line at the first left stop is the same as that for the Replay B1 table, so a description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, in a game using the replay C1 table, at the first stop in the middle, the "replay" is stopped in the middle middle ("PB=1"). Thereafter, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the lower left row ("PB=1"). In this case, the "replay" is stopped in the middle left row. Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, a "watermelon" is stopped at the upper right row ("PB=1"). In this case, "Replay" will stop in the middle right row. As a result, "Bell A/Bell B" - "Replay" - "Watermelon" stops on the active line, and Replay 03 becomes a winning prize. Furthermore, "replay" - "replay" - "replay" is stopped in "left middle row" - "middle middle row" - "right middle row".

In a game in which the Replay C1 table is used, the same control is applied when the replay stops on the first right button as when the replay stops on the first center button. Furthermore, the same control is applied to the Replay C2 table when a Replay C2 is won, and the Replay C3 table when a Replay C3 is won, so that Replay 01 is awarded when the button sequence is correct, and Replay 03 is awarded when the button sequence is incorrect.

The Replay D table is used in the game when Replay D is won, and within the range of reel 31 stop control, the replay D table is used to set the stop position of the reel 31 so that the replay 06 is stopped on the active line regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed. It has been established. Replay 06 is "PB=1". In addition, the Replay E table is used in the game when Replay E is won, and the Replay E table is used in a game where Replay E is won, and within the range of stop control of the reels 31, the Replay E table is set such that Replay 04 or 05 is stopped on the active line regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed. 31 stop positions are determined. In this case, either replay 04 or 05 can be stopped with "PB=1".

The small win A table is used in play when the small win A is won, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small win 01 stops on an active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The symbol combination of the small win 01 is "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay", and "PB=1" is set on all reels 31. When "Black 7/Watermelon" stops on the lower left row, "Bell A/Bell B" stops on the middle left row. Furthermore, when "Replay" stops on the upper right row, "Bell A/Bell B" stops on the middle right row. Therefore, when the small win 01 is won, "Bell A/Bell B" - "Bell C" - "Bell A/Bell B" stop on the "middle left row" - "middle middle row" - "middle right row".

The small win B1 table is used in the game when the small win B1 is won, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small win 01 is stopped on the active line, and the left At times other than the first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), one card included in the winning combination (when winning a small role B1, any of the minor roles 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26). The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the reel 31 on the effective line or stop any one of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

The first stop on the left (when the push order is correct) in a game using the small winning combination B1 table is the same as the small winning combination A table, so the explanation will be omitted. In addition, when the following small winning combination B2 table to small winning combination B12 table are used, when the pressing order is correct, the same stop control as the small winning combination A table is performed. As a result, when the small role A is won and when the small role B group is won and the pressing order is correct, the small role 01 will always be won, and the position will be "left middle row" - "middle middle row" - "right middle row". "Bell A/Bell B" - "Bell C" - "Bell A/Bell B" stops. Therefore, even if the small winning combination 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether it is the winning of the small winning combination A or the correct pressing order when winning the small winning combination B group.

In addition, even during the advantageous zone, if the instruction function is activated as a dummy as described above when a small win A is won, the player will not know whether it is a win for small win A or a win for group B of small wins. As described above, in this embodiment, since there is a set difference in the number of wins for small win A, it is possible to infer the set value by counting the number of times that small win A has been won. However, if the stop results are the same when a small win A is won and when the push order is correct when group B of small wins is won, it will not be possible to count only the number of times that small win A has been won, and it will no longer be possible to infer the set value.

Further, in a game using the small winning combination B1 table, more specifically, the following stop control is executed. First, when the small winning combination B1 is won, as shown in FIG. 14, seven small winning combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26 are won, and the combinations of the symbols are as follows. Small role 01: "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay" (9 cards) Small role 03: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (1 card) Small role 10: " Bell B” - “Bell B” - “Bell B” (1 piece) Small role 11: “Bell C” - “Bell A” - “Blue 7” (1 piece) Small role 18: “Red 7” - “Bell B” - “Red 7” (1 piece) Small role 19: “Bell C” - “Blue 7” - “Bell A” (1 piece) Small role 26: “Red 7” - “Red 7” - “Bell B ” (1 piece)

The following method can be used to control the reels 31 to stop when a plurality of small winning combinations with different numbers of coins are won. As a first priority, if all the symbols (on the reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to "stop all of the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination on an active line" (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the reel 31 is controlled to stop according to either "number priority" or "piece priority" as the second priority. Here, "number priority" refers to stopping (pulling in) the symbols on the reel 31 that make up the combination of symbols that will pay out the most coins among the overlapping winning symbol combinations on an active line as a priority. For this reason, when the small win group B is won, small win 01 corresponds to the combination of symbols that will pay out the most coins (9 coins). On the other hand, "number priority" refers to stopping the symbols on the reel 31 on an active line so as to maximize the number of symbol combinations that can stop on an active line.

For example, when the small win B1 is won and the first stop is in the middle, it is not possible to stop all of the middle reels 31 related to the winning win on the active line at the same time. This is because while there are multiple types of symbols on the middle reel 31 of the winning small winning combination, there is only one active line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped on the active line.

Therefore, when the small winning combination B group is won, the reels 31 are controlled to stop depending on either the number of winnings or the number of winnings. In the present embodiment, when the pressing order is correct, the reels 31 are controlled to stop with priority given to the number of sheets, and when the pressing order is wrong, the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped according to the number of sheets given priority. When the reels are controlled to stop based on the number of winnings, the minor winning combination 01 (9 winning combination) is configured so that the winning winning combination is possible without winning the winning winning combination (9 winning winning combination), but it is possible to win the winning winning combination (there is a possibility that the winning combination may be missed). In this way, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is such that the number of sheets is given priority in a specific pressing order (correct pressing order in this embodiment), and the number is given priority in other pressing orders (incorrect pressing order in this embodiment). Priority is given to the number of sheets or pieces depending on the situation.

In the above example, if you want to give priority to the number of pieces when the middle first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), if you stop either "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the effective line, it will stop on the effective line. The maximum number of possible combinations of symbols is two each. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won. “Bell A” or “Bell B” on the middle reel 31 has a total of two symbols and “PB = 1”, so when the middle reel 31 stops, either “Bell A” or “Bell B” always stops. can be done. Here, it is assumed that "Bell A" is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won.

Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "Bell A" or "Bell C" on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 5, on the left reel 31, "Bell A" is placed at number 15 and number 0, and "Bell C" is placed at number 18. Therefore, when the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are numbers 11 to 19 and number 0, "Bell A" or "Bell C" can be stopped on the active line. When the numbers are 1 to 10, "Bell A" or "Bell C" cannot be stopped on the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped randomly (without aiming for a specific symbol), there is a 1/2 probability that either Bell A or Bell C will stop on a winning line. In particular, in this embodiment, Bell A can be stopped without Bell C being stopped, so when the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are numbers 11 to 19 and number 0, Bell A is always stopped on a winning line. Note that the reason Bell A is stopped without Bell C in this way is so that a pattern symbol, which will be described later, can be displayed if a winning combination is missed on the third stop (because if Bell C is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped, the pattern symbol cannot be displayed).

On the other hand, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the active line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that any pattern symbol is stopped on the active line. As shown in FIG. 12, among the pattern symbols in which the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "Bell A", the symbol on the left reel 31 is "Black 7" or "Watermelon". Since the sum of the two symbols "Black 7" or "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB=1", one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the first stop in the center and the second stop on the left, it becomes "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Rotating". . Furthermore, before the right third stop, if "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", when the right reel 31 stops, if it is possible to stop "Bell A" on the active line, "Bell A" is "Rotating". Stop Bell A. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" on the active line, if the symbol on the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of numbers 4 to 13, "Bell A" will be stopped. "Bell A" cannot be stopped in any other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, there is a probability of "1/2" that "Bell A" will stop on the active line. When "Bell A" is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A", resulting in a winning of small winning combination 03.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 stops, "Cherry" is placed on the active line. (PB=1). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Cherry", and pattern symbol 03 stops. In addition, in the case of "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", when the right reel 31 stops, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1") ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Bell A/Bell B", and pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped on the active line at the first stop in the middle when winning the small winning combination B1 (when the pressing order is incorrect). In this case, at this point, it becomes possible to win a small winning combination of 10 or 18. Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "Bell B" or "Red 7", which is the symbol related to the small winning combination 10 or 18, on the active line. As shown in FIG. 5, on the left reel 31, "Bell B" is placed at number 5 and number 10, and "Red 7" is placed at number 7. Therefore, when the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are numbers 1 to 10, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can be stopped on the active line; In some cases, "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped on the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), there is a probability of "1/2" that "Bell B" or "Red 7" will stop on the active line. In particular, in this embodiment, since it is possible to stop "Bell B" without stopping "Red 7", when the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are numbers 1 to 10, always stops "Bell B" on the active line.

On the other hand, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the active line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that any pattern symbol is stopped on the active line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern symbol on the middle reel 31 whose symbol is "Bell B" is "Black 7" or "Watermelon". Since the sum of the two symbols "Black 7" or "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB=1", one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the first stop in the center and the second stop on the left, it becomes "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Rotating". . Furthermore, before the right third stop, if "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", when the right reel 31 stops, if it is possible to stop "Bell B" on the active line, then " Bell B" is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell B" on the active line, the symbol on the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated must be in the range of numbers 14 to 18, or numbers 19 to 3. For example, "Bell B" can be stopped, and "Bell B" cannot be stopped in any other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, there is a probability of "1/2" that "Bell B" will stop on the active line. When "Bell B" is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell B", resulting in a small win of 10.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 stops, "Cherry" is placed on the active line. (PB=1). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Cherry", and pattern symbol 03 stops. In addition, in the case of "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", when the right reel 31 stops, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1") ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Bell A/Bell B", and pattern symbol 01 stops.

As described above, at the time of the middle first stop when winning the small winning combination B1, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbols related to the 1-card winning combination with "PB=1", and both the left and right reels 31 have "1" on the middle reel 31. It is possible to stop the symbols related to a one-card combination with a probability of "/2". Furthermore, when it is not possible to stop the symbols associated with a single winning combination, the pattern symbols can always be stopped. Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won and the middle first stop occurs (when the pressing order is incorrect), 1-card winning combination: 1/4 probability of winning, pattern symbol: 3/4 probability of stopping. Furthermore, when winning a 1-piece role, either "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (Small role 03) "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (Small role 10) Become.

Next, a case will be described when the right first stop occurs when the small winning combination B1 is won. When giving priority to the number of pieces when the right reel 31 stops, if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line, the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the active line is 2 each. becomes the maximum. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, small winning combinations 03 or 19 can be won. "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the right reel 31 has a total of two symbols, "PB = 1", so when the right reel 31 stops, "Bell A" or "Bell B" can always be stopped. can. First, it is assumed that "Bell A" is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won.

Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "Bell A" or "Bell C", which are symbols related to minor prizes 03 or 19, on a valid line. Here, as above, priority is given to stopping "Bell A". "Bell A" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". Also, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped (the two symbols combined give "PB=1").

Therefore, at the first stop on the right and second stop on the left, it becomes "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell A". . Furthermore, in the case where "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" before the middle third stop, when "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 stops, "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line. Stop Bell A. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" on the active line, if the symbol on the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of numbers 5 to 14, "Bell A" will be stopped. "Bell A" cannot be stopped within any other range. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, there is a probability of "1/2" that "Bell A" will stop on the active line. When "Bell A" is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A", resulting in a winning of small winning combination 03.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 stops, "Blue 7" or "Cherry" ” is stopped on the active line (“PB=1” in total of 2 symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the effective line. In addition, in the case of "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", when the middle reel 31 stops, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1") ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the effective line.

Further, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 first stops. In this case, at this point, it is possible to win a small winning combination of 10 or 26. Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "Bell B" or "Red 7", which are the symbols related to the small winning combination 10 or 26, on the active line. Here, priority is given to stopping "Bell B." "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". Moreover, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped (the sum of the two symbols is "PB=1").

Therefore, at the first stop on the right and second stop on the left, it becomes "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell B". . Furthermore, in the case where "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B" before the middle third stop, when "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 stops, "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line. Bell B" is stopped. Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, there is a probability of "1/2" that "Bell B" will stop on the active line. When "Bell B" is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell B", resulting in a small win of 10.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 stops, "Blue 7" or "Cherry" ” is stopped on the active line (“PB=1” in total of 2 symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the effective line. In addition, in the case of "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", when the middle reel 31 stops, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1") ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the effective line.

From the above, when the right first stop occurs when winning the small winning combination B1, the right reel 31 can stop the symbols related to the 1-card winning combination with "PB=1", and both the left and right reel 31 have "1". It is possible to stop the symbols related to a one-card combination with a probability of "/2". Furthermore, when it is not possible to stop the symbols associated with a single winning combination, the pattern symbols can always be stopped. Therefore, when winning the small winning combination B1, when the right first stop occurs (when the pressing order is incorrect), the winning pattern will be 1/4 chance of winning and the pattern symbol: 3/4 chance of stopping. Furthermore, when winning a 1-piece role, either "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (Small role 03) "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (Small role 10) Become. This winning rate and pattern symbol stop rate are the same as those at the first stop. Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, when the left first stop is made (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is won with "PB=1". On the other hand, when the middle or right first stops (when the pressing order is incorrect), there is a probability of ``1/4'' that a 1-card winning combination will be won, and a probability of ``3/4'' that the pattern symbol will stop. .

When the small winning combination B2 is won, the small winning combination B2 table is provided similarly to when the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when winning small role B2 are: Small role 01: "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay" (9 pieces) Small role 04: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell B” (1 piece) Small role 09: “Bell B” - “Bell B” - “Bell A” (1 piece) Small role 12: “Bell C” - “Bell A” - “Red 7” (1 piece) Minor role 17: “Red 7” – “Bell B” – “Blue 7” (1 piece) Minor role 20: “Bell C” – “Blue 7” – “Bell B” (1 piece) Minor role 25: “Red 7” - “Red 7” - “Bell A” (1 piece).

Then, when the reel stops first on the left (when the push order is correct), a small prize 01 is awarded. Next, when the reel stops first in the middle (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line based on the number of reels. First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first stop in the middle, when the reel stops on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, when "Bell C" can be stopped, "Bell A" can also be stopped, so "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C". Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, the result is either "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Spinning" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Spinning".

When "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", if "Bell B" can be stopped when the right side is stopped, "Bell B" is stopped. As a result, the small winning combination 04 is won. Moreover, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped when the right side is stopped, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops. On the other hand, when "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped when the right side is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, let's say that "Bell B" is stopped during the first center stop. In this case, during a left stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, if "Red 7" can be stopped, "Bell B" can also be stopped, so "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". Also, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, the result is either "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Spinning", or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Spinning".

"Bell B" - "Bell B" - When "Rotating", when stopping on the right side, "Bell A" is stopped if it is possible to stop "Bell A". This results in the winning of small role 09. Also, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped when stopping on the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops. On the other hand, when "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped when the right side is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, when the small winning combination B2 is won and the right first stop is made (when the pressing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line by giving priority to the number of pieces. First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first stop on the right, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" when stopped on the left. Here, when "Red 7" can be stopped, "Bell B" can be stopped, so "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". Moreover, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell A".

When "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped if "Bell B" can be stopped during a mid-stop. This results in the winning of small role 09. Furthermore, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops. On the other hand, when "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" is established, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, assume that "Bell B" is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, when "Bell C" can be stopped, "Bell A" can be stopped, so "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C". Moreover, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell B" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell B".

When "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped if it is possible to stop "Bell A" at the middle stop. As a result, the small winning combination 04 is won. Furthermore, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops. On the other hand, when "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell B" is established, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning small winning combination B2, if the pressing order is incorrect, 1 winning combination: 1/4 probability of winning, pattern symbol: 3/4 probability of stopping. Furthermore, when winning a 1-card role, either "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" (minor role 04) or "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (minor role 09) Become.

As with the win of the small win B1, the small win B3 table is also provided when the small win B3 is won. The winning roles included in the win of the small win B3 are: Small win 01: "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay" (9 pieces) Small win 05: "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (1 piece) Small win 08: "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" (1 piece) Small win 13: "Bell C" - "Bell B" - "Blue 7" (1 piece) Small win 16: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Red 7" (1 piece) Small win 21: "Bell C" - "Red 7" - "Bell A" (1 piece) Small win 24: "Red 7" - "Blue 7" - "Bell B" (1 piece).

Then, at the first stop on the left (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is won. Next, when the middle first stop occurs (when the pressing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line based on the number of objects. First, when stopping "Bell A" at the first stop in the middle, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" when stopping on the left. Here, similarly to the above, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". Moreover, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Rotating".

When "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped if it is possible to stop "Bell B" when the right side is stopped. This results in the winning of small role 08. Moreover, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped when the right side is stopped, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops. On the other hand, when "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped when the right side is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, let's say that "Bell B" is stopped during the first center stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, as above, "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C". Also, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, the result is either "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Spinning", or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Spinning".

When "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", if "Bell A" can be stopped when the right side is stopped, "Bell A" is stopped. This results in the winning of small role 05. Also, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped when stopping on the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops. On the other hand, when "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped when the right side is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, when the small winning combination B2 is won and the right first stop is made (when the pressing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line by giving priority to the number of pieces. First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first stop on the right, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" when stopped on the left. Here, "Bell A" is stopped in the same way as above. Moreover, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell A".

When "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped if it is possible to stop "Bell B" at the middle stop. This results in the winning of small role 05. Furthermore, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops. On the other hand, when "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" is established, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, let's say that "Bell B" is stopped when the first stop is made on the right. In this case, when the left stop is made, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, "Bell B" is stopped in the same way as above. Also, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, the result is either "Bell B" - "Spinning" - "Bell B", or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Spinning" - "Bell B".

When "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped if it is possible to stop "Bell A" during the middle stop. This results in the winning of small role 08. Furthermore, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops. On the other hand, when "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell B" is established, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning small winning combination B3, if the pressing order is incorrect, 1 winning combination: 1/4 probability of winning, pattern symbol: 3/4 probability of stopping. Furthermore, when winning a 1-card role, either "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (minor role 05) or "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" (minor role 08) Become.

When the small winning combination B4 is won, the small winning combination B4 table is provided similarly to when the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when winning small role B4 are: Small role 01: "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay" (9 pieces) Small role 06: "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Bell B” (1 piece) Small role 07: “Bell B” – “Bell A” – “Bell A” (1 piece) Small role 14: “Bell C” – “Bell B” – “Red 7” (1 piece) Minor role 15: “Red 7” – “Bell A” – “Blue 7” (1 piece) Minor role 22: “Bell C” – “Red 7” – “Bell B” (1 piece) Minor role 23: “Red 7” - “Blue 7” - “Bell A” (1 piece).

Then, at the first stop on the left (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is won. Next, when the middle first stop occurs (when the pressing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line based on the number of objects. First, when stopping "Bell A" at the first stop in the center, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" when stopping on the left, but here, in the same way as above, Stop "Bell B". Moreover, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Rotating".

When the situation is "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Spinning", if "Bell A" can be stopped when the reel stops to the right, "Bell A" is stopped. This results in the winning of minor prize 07. Also, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped when the reel stops to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. This causes pattern symbol 03 to stop. On the other hand, when the situation is "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Spinning", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped when the reel stops to the right. This causes pattern symbol 01 to stop.

Next, assume that "Bell B" is stopped at the first stop in the middle. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, "Bell A" is stopped in the same way as above. Moreover, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Rotating".

When "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", if "Bell B" can be stopped when the right side is stopped, "Bell B" is stopped. This results in the winning of the small winning combination 06. Moreover, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped when the right side is stopped, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops. On the other hand, when "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped when the right side is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, when the right first stop occurs when the small winning combination B4 is won (when the pressing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line by giving priority to the number of pieces. First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first stop on the right, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" when stopped on the left. Here, "Bell B" is stopped in the same way as above. Moreover, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell A".

When "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", "Bell A" is stopped if it is possible to stop "Bell A" during the middle stop. As a result, the small winning combination 07 is won. Furthermore, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops. On the other hand, when "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" is established, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, let's say that "Bell B" is stopped when the first right stop occurs. In this case, when the left stop occurs, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, "Bell A" is stopped in the same way as above. Also, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, the result is either "Bell A" - "Spinning" - "Bell B", or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Spinning" - "Bell B".

When "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell B" is stopped if it is possible to stop "Bell B" at the middle stop. This results in the winning of the small winning combination 06. Furthermore, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops. On the other hand, when "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell B" is established, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning small winning combination B4, if the pressing order is incorrect, 1 winning combination: 1/4 probability of winning, pattern symbol: 3/4 probability of stopping. Furthermore, when winning a 1-card role, either "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (minor role 06) or "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (minor role 07) Become.

Hereafter, detailed explanations of the small prize B5 table to the small prize B12 table when the small prize B5 to B12 are won will be omitted, and only the outline will be explained. In the small prize B5 table used when the small prize B5 is won, when the first middle stop occurs when the push order is correct, the small prize 01 is won, and when the push order is incorrect, the small prize 03 or small prize 10 is won with a probability of "1/4", and the pattern symbol is stopped with a probability of "3/4". In other words, the small prize that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small prize B1 is won. In addition, in the small prize B6 table used when the small prize B6 is won, the small prize 01 is won when the first middle stop occurs when the push order is correct, and when the push order is incorrect, the small prize 04 or small prize 09 is won with a probability of "1/4", and the pattern symbol is stopped with a probability of "3/4". In other words, the small prize that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small prize B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small role B7 table used when winning the small role B7, the small role 01 will be won at the first stop in the middle when the pressing order is correct, and the small role 01 will be won with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. 05 or small winning combination 08 will be won, and the pattern symbol will stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3. Furthermore, in the small role B8 table used when winning the small role B8, the small role 01 will be won at the first stop in the middle when the push order is correct, and the small role 06 will be won with a probability of "1/4" when the push order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 07 will be won and the pattern symbols will stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B4.

In the small prize B9 table used when the small prize B9 is won, small prize 01 is won when the first button stops on the right when the button is pressed correctly, and when the button is pressed incorrectly, small prize 03 or small prize 10 is won with a probability of 1/4, and a pattern symbol is stopped with a probability of 3/4. In other words, the small prizes that can be won when the button is pressed incorrectly are the same as when the small prize B1 is won. In addition, in the small prize B10 table used when the small prize B10 is won, small prize 01 is won when the first button stops on the right when the button is pressed correctly, and when the button is pressed incorrectly, small prize 04 or small prize 09 is won with a probability of 1/4, and a pattern symbol is stopped with a probability of 3/4. In other words, the small prizes that can be won when the button is pressed incorrectly are the same as when the small prize B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small role B11 table used when winning the small role B11, when the pressing order is correct and the first stop on the right, the small role 01 will be won, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the small role 01 will be won with a probability of "1/4". 05 or small winning combination 08 will be won, and the pattern symbol will stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3. Furthermore, in the small role B12 table used when winning the small role B12, when the pressing order is correct and the first stop on the right side, the small role 01 will be won, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the small role 06 will be won with a probability of "1/4". Alternatively, the small winning combination 07 will be won and the pattern symbols will stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B4.

As is clear from the above, if the push order is incorrect when winning group B of small prizes, the 1-coin prizes that can be won are small prizes 03 to 10. Therefore, small prizes other than those listed above that are included in each condition device will not be won. This setting is related to the 1-coin prizes that can be won when group C of small prizes, which will be described later, is won.

The small win C1 table is used in play when the small win C1 is won, and determines the stopping position of the reel 31 so that, within the range of the stopping control of the reel 31, when it stops first on the left (when the push order is correct), the small win 02 stops on the winning line, and when it stops other than first on the left (when the push order is incorrect), the 1-coin role included in the winning role (when the small win C1 is won, any of the small wins 03 to 10) stops on the winning line.

When the small win C1 (same for small wins C2 and C3 described below) is won, if the pressing order is correct, the number of coins is prioritized, and small win 02 (3 coins) is won, just like when small win group B is won. The combination of symbols corresponding to small win 02 is "Bell A/Bell B"-"Blue 7/Cherry"-"Watermelon" as shown in FIG. 7, and "PB=1" is set on all reels 31. Therefore, if the pressing order is correct, small win 02 can always be won.

In addition, when the small winning combination C1 is won, when the pressing order is incorrect (when the middle or right first stop), control is performed so that one winning combination (small winning combinations 03 to 10) is won by giving priority to the number of pieces. Here, the symbol combinations of small winning combinations 03 to 10 are "Bell A" or "Bell B" symbol combinations on each reel 31, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, among the symbol combinations of small winnings 03 to 10, on any reel 31, there are 4 “Bell A” and 4 “Bell B”, and either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is selected. Even if it is stopped, the condition of number priority is satisfied. Particularly, when the small winning combination C2 and the small winning combination C3 are won, the small winning combination 21 and the small winning combination 22 are included, respectively, but even if these small winning combinations are included in the winning winning combination, there is no change in the types of symbols whose number is prioritized. Furthermore, on all the reels 31, the sum of the two symbols "Bell A" or "Bell B" is "PB=1". Therefore, it is possible to always win any of the small winning combinations 03 to 10.

From the above, when winning the small role C1, if the pressing order is correct, the small role 02 (3-card role) will be won ("PB = 1"), and if the pressing order is incorrect, any of the small roles 03 to 10 (1 The prize winning (“PB=1”) is won (“PB=1”), and the winning (stopping of the pattern symbols) as in the case of winning the small winning group B does not occur.

The small role C2 table and the small role C3 table used when the small role C2 is won and the small role C3 is won are also the same as the small role C1 table. As shown in FIG. 16, when the small winning combination C2 is won, the first stop in the middle is the correct pressing order, and when the small winning combination C3 is winning, the right first stop is the correct pressing order. The stop control for winning the small winning combination 02 or the small winning combinations 03 to 10 is the same as that for winning the small winning combination C1, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, there are 1-card roles (small roles 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small role B group, and 1-card roles (small roles 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small role C group. Small roles 03 to 10) will be the same. As a result, it is no longer possible to judge which of the small winning combinations B group or C winning group has been won in the game just by looking at the winnings of small winning combinations 03 to 10.

The small winning combination D table is used in the game when the small winning combination D is won, and the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small winning combination 35 is stopped on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In the small winning combination D table, the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed does not matter. As shown in FIG. 9, the combination of symbols of the small winning combination 35 is "Watermelon". “Watermelon” is placed in “PB≠1” on the left and middle reels 31, and “PB=1” on the right reel 31. Therefore, in a game where the small winning combination D table is used, on the left and middle reels 31, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" stops on the active line, the "watermelon" will stop on the active line, but the "watermelon" will stop on the active line. If the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the "Watermelon" does not stop on the active line, the "Watermelon" does not stop on the active line and the small winning combination 35 is lost.

The small win E1 table is used in play when the small win E1 is won, and determines the stopping position of the reel 31 so that the small win 36 or 38 stops on a winning line within the range of the stopping control of the reel 31. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first stop on the left or middle, the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined so that the so-called middle row cherry stopping shape is achieved (so that the "cherry" stops in the middle left row). In contrast, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first stop on the right, the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle row cherry does not stop.

In addition, the winning of the small winning combination E1 includes the small winning combinations 36 and 38 (furthermore, when winning the small winning combination E2 described later, the small winning combination 37 is included), but since all of these small winning combinations are two-card winning, the above-mentioned The number/number priority given above is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by any predetermined stop control. For this reason, control is performed so that priority is given to winning the small winning combination 36 when the first stop is on the left or middle, and control is given to giving priority to winning the small winning combination 38 when the first stopping is on the right.

In FIG. 5, the "cherries" on the left reel 31 are numbers 3, 8, and 13 ("PB≠1"). Then, when "Cherry" is stopped at the middle left row, "Blank" or "Red 7" is stopped at the effective line, which is the lower left row. Therefore, in this case, the symbols related to the small winning combination 36 are stopped on the left reel 31.

For example, when the number 7 "Red 7" is stopped on the lower left row at the first stop on the left ("Cherry" is stopped on the middle left row), "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is valid when the middle reel 31 stops. When the right reel 31 is stopped, either "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7", or "Blank" (the total of 4 symbols is "PB = 1"). 1) is stopped at the effective line. This results in a winning of 36 small prizes. Also, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the "blank" of number 2 or 12 is stopped at the lower left row ("cherry" is placed at the middle left row)
Regarding stop), similarly to the above, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is stopped on the active line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Black 7", "Blue 7", Stop either "Red 7" or "Blank" on the valid line. This results in a winning of 36 small prizes.

Stop control is also performed in the same manner as above when the middle first stop is performed. Therefore, on the middle and right reels 31, the symbols related to the small winning combination 36 stop at "PB=1", and on the left reel 31, there are cases where "red 7" or "blank" stops and cases where they do not stop ( "PB≠1"). However, if it is not possible to stop "Red 7" or "Blank" in the lower left row at the time of the first left or center stop, "Bell A" or "Bell B" will be stopped. "Bell A" or "Bell B" can be stopped by "PB=1". In this case, the stop form is "Bell A/Bell B" - "Blue 7/Cherry" - "Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank", and the small winning combination 38 is won.

On the other hand, in a game using the small winning combination E1 table, when the right first stop occurs, priority is given to winning the small winning combination 38. Therefore, in this case, "Bell A/Bell B" - "Blue 7/Cherry" - "Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank" is stopped, and the small winning combination 38 is won with "PB=1". . Furthermore, at the first right stop, even if "Cherry" can be stopped in the middle left row when the left reel 31 stops, "Cherry" is not stopped in the middle left row and "Bell A" or "Bell A" is placed in the lower left row. B" (in this case, "Cherry" is not stopped at the middle left row).

The small winning combination E2 table is used in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the reel 31 is set so that the small winning combination 36 or 38 (or the small winning combination 37) is stopped on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The stopping position is determined. Therefore, since the small winning combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small winning combination E1 table, it is possible to use the same stop position determination table.

Alternatively, in the case of the first stop on the left, only when "Red 7" or "Blank" can be stopped on the lower left row (when the middle row cherry is stopped), "Replay" is set to the active line for the middle reel 31. (PB=1), and for the right reel 31, any one of "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7", or "Blank" may be stopped. As a result, the small winning combination 37 is won. If the stop control is performed in this way, the stop control will be able to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 is won when the middle cherry is stopped.

The small win F table is used in the game when the small win F is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that any of the small wins 01 to 39 is stopped on the active line within the range of the reel 31 stop control. It has been established. In this embodiment, the small winning combination F is drawn only during the 1BB operation. In addition, the small winning combination F table performs stop control with priority given to the number of coins, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. As a result, the small winning combination 39 is always won. Note that on the left reel 31, the sum of the two symbols "Cherry" or "Bell C" is arranged as "PB=1", so the small winning combination 39 is won with "PB=1".

The small win G table is used in a game when the small win G is won, and determines the stopping position of the reel 31 so that the small win 40 stops on a winning line within the range of the stopping control of the reel 31. Since the small win 40 is made up of a combination of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement for all reels 31, it is always possible to win the small win 40 in this game.

The 1BBA table is used in a game when the reel condition device number "1" is won (1BBA is won alone), or when 1BBA has been won in a previous game and is not won in the current game, and determines the combination of symbols when the reels 31 stop so that, within the range of the stopping control of the reels 31, a combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is stopped on an active line, while a combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1BBA is not stopped on an active line. Since the symbol for 1BBA is "red 7" on all reels 31 (PB ≠ 1), the "red 7" cannot be stopped on an active line without eye-pressing.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used when the accessory condition device number "2" is won (1BBB won alone), or when 1BBB was won before the previous game and is not won in the current game, and the reel 31 Within the range of stop control, the symbol combinations when the reel 31 is stopped are controlled so that the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BBB are stopped on the active line, and the symbol combinations corresponding to roles other than 1BBB are not stopped on the active line. This is a set of combinations. As with 1BBA, the symbols of 1BBB are "PB≠1" on all reels 31, so "Red 7" and "Black 7" cannot be stopped on the active line unless you press them.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in a game where 1BB and a minor role or replay were won at the same time, or in a game where 1BB was won before the previous game and a minor role or replay was won in this game, the following stop control will be applied. can be mentioned.

For example, first, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and small winning or replay symbols on the active line, and if both symbols cannot be stopped on the active line, the winning small winning An example of this is stop control that gives priority to stopping the winning combination or replay symbols on the active line. In addition, the stop control that stops both the symbols of 1BB and small roles or replays on the active line is until the second stop, and at the third stop, it is controlled to make 1BB or small roles or replays win, and multiple No two roles will be awarded twice. Second, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small winning or replay symbols on the active line, and if both symbols cannot be stopped on the active line, the winning 1BB An example of stop control is to give priority to stopping the symbol on the active line (opposite to the above).

Furthermore, thirdly, although priority is given to stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the active line, when stopping the winning minor role or replay symbol on the active line, When it is possible to stop the winning 1BB symbols on the active line at the same time, stop control may be used to stop them at that position.

In addition, when 1BB ("PB≠1") and a minor prize or replay of "PB=1" are won multiple times (when they are won at the same time), the winning 1BB symbol and the minor prize or replay are It is not necessary to perform control to stop both the symbol and the symbol on the active line, and it is also possible to perform control so that only the small winning combination of "PB=1" or the replay symbol is stopped on the active line. Therefore, since the minor prizes E1 and E2 are "PB=1", when 1BBA and minor prize E1 of this embodiment are won repeatedly, or when 1BBB and minor prize E2 are twice won, only the minor prize E1 or E2, respectively. It is also possible to execute stop control that causes the player to win a prize.

Referring back to FIG. 1 for explanation, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols on the reels 31 that have stopped on an active line matches a combination of symbols that corresponds to any winning combination when the reels 31 stop (whether or not any winning combination has been won). The winning determination means 66 determines the symbols on an active line by, for example, detecting the angle or number of steps when the motor 32 stops.

The payout means 67 determines by the winning determination means 66 that the combination of symbols that stopped on the active line when the reels 31 stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to one of the winning combinations, and the winning of that winning combination occurs. , pays out a predetermined number of medals to the player, or performs processing such as adding credits, depending on the winning combination. Furthermore, when winning a prize in a replay, the number of medals inserted in the current game is controlled to be automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 judges whether the RT transition conditions are met for each game when all reels 31 stop, and controls the transition to RT when it is judged that the RT transition conditions are met. Figure 22 is a diagram showing the RT transition diagram in this embodiment. As described above, the RT in this embodiment comprises non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), and 1BBB operation (1BBB game). And, as shown in Figures 17 and 18, the type (number) of condition devices drawn and the probability of winning are different for each RT.

In this embodiment, the RT transition timing is set to the time when a symbol combination is stopped and displayed or the RT transition combination is won, that is, when all the reels 31 are stopped (when all reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, when the pattern symbols stop when all the reels 31 stop during RT1, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 at the time when all the reels 31 stop. Note that the transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on winning 1BB, or based on the fact that 1BB was not won in a game in which 1BB was won. Good too. In this embodiment, the process moves to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB was not won in the game in which 1BB was won.

Non-internal games correspond to non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3. Further, the internal medium game corresponds to RT4. Also, during the advantageous section, the slot machine 10 is basically controlled to stay at RT3, but if the player presses the stop switch 42 in the wrong order, etc., it may stay at RT2. be. In the case of an advantageous section that ends with only one instruction function activation game (excluding games in which the small winning combination C group, replay B group, and replay C group is won), it is not necessary to stay in RT3. That is, in RT2, the advantageous section may be completed by playing one instruction function activation game (excluding games in which the small role C group, replay B group, and replay C group are won). Of course, it is also possible to basically make it stay in RT3.

In the non-RT, non-internal medium games of RT1 to RT3, a lottery for accessory condition devices is held. When 1BB is won in these RTs, but 1BB is not won, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition conditions for RT are satisfied, and shifts to RT4, which corresponds to the internal medium game. Further, when 1BB is won in a game in which 1BB is won, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB is started when the current game is completely stopped, so in this case, RT4 (internal medium game) is not passed.

RT4 continues until the winning 1BB wins. When the RT control means 68 determines that 1BBA or 1BBB has been won in RT4, it determines that the RT transition conditions are satisfied and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively. Once 1BBA is in operation, it continues until the 1BBA operation end condition is met. In this embodiment, the condition for terminating the operation of 1BBA is set that the number of coins to be paid out exceeds 150 coins.

During each game, during the 1BBA operation, the RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the RT control means 68 sets the conditions for ending the 1BBA operation. It is determined that the conditions are satisfied, and control is performed to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The same applies to the 1BBB operation. Once the 1BBB is in operation, it continues until the 1BBB operation end condition is met. In this embodiment, the condition for ending the 1BBB operation is set to the payout of more than 200 medals. The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 200 medals have been paid out in each game, and when it is determined that more than 200 medals have been paid out, it determines that the operation termination condition of 1 BBB is satisfied, Control is performed to shift to RT1 from the next game.

Note that replays are not included in the count of 150 or 200 sheets during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 17, while the 1BB is in operation, there is a possibility of winning Replay D, but the automatic bet made at the time of winning Replay is not counted in the number of coins paid out. Therefore, the more you win Replay D, the more the number of games played during 1BB operation increases. In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of Replay D when 1BBA is active is set to 10 times that of when 1BBB is active, so the expected value of the number of games when 1BBA is active is The number of games played during the game will be greater than the expected value.

While 1BBA and 1BBB are in operation, RB is in continuous operation as described above. The RB ends when either two winning combinations or two games are satisfied, and after the end, the RB is activated again on the condition that the termination condition for the 1BB activation is not satisfied. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small winning combination E2 during 1BBA operation is set higher in setting 6 than in setting 1. When the small winning combination E2 is won and the small winning combination 36 or 38 is won, the number of coins to be paid out is two. As a result, in setting 6, the number of games until the end condition (exceeding 150 coins) is reached during 1BBA operation is greater than in setting 1. Therefore, during the 1BBA operation during the advantageous section, the expected value of winning Replay D is higher with setting 6 than with setting 1, so the probability that the advantageous section will be added becomes higher. Details regarding this point will be explained in the control of the advantageous section described later.

When the RWM 53 is initialized, the game starts from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the RWM 53 is initialized, RT may be maintained. Here, for example, if the RWM 53 is initialized while the winning of 1BB is carried over, the winning of 1BB is also maintained (carried over).

In the non-RT mode, the RT control means 68 continues the non-RT mode until the pattern symbol is displayed. In non-RT, small winning combinations B group are drawn, and if one of the small winning combinations B group is won and the winning small winning combination is missed, a pattern symbol is displayed. When the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition for RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT2 from the next game. In RT1, similarly to non-RT, RT1 is maintained until the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in RT1, the process moves to RT2.

RT2 is the RT with the highest stay rate in the normal section. In RT2, when Replay B group wins and Replay 02 wins, it is determined that the transition conditions for RT are satisfied, and the game shifts to RT3 from the next game. On the other hand, RT3 continues until a pattern symbol is displayed or Replay C group wins and Replay 03 wins. In RT3, when a pattern symbol is displayed or when Replay 03 wins, it is determined that the transition conditions for RT are satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT2.

As described above, in the normal section (and non-interior), most of the passengers go back and forth between RT2 and RT3, but in terms of probability, the stay rate in RT2 is the highest. As mentioned above, when you win 1BB in RT2 or RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), you will move to RT4 (internal) from the next game.

In addition, if it is decided to move to the advantageous section during the normal section, and the game decided to move to the advantageous section is RT3, in order to maintain RT3, there will be an instruction function when winning Replay C group. is activated to display the correct answer press order for winning Replay 01. This prevents the person from falling to RT2. Furthermore, when the small winning combination B group is won, the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is displayed by activating the instruction function. Similarly, when the small winning combination C group is won, the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 02 is displayed by activating the instruction function.

On the other hand, when the game that is decided to move to the advantageous section is RT2, while activating the instruction function as described above, when the Replay B group is won, by activating the instruction function, the correct answer is to make Replay 02 win. The pressing order is displayed and control is performed to move to RT3. Also, if it is decided to move to the advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, it will move to the advantageous section even if it is non-RT or RT1, but until the pattern symbol is displayed, the instruction function In a game in which the instruction function can be activated (for example, when a small winning group B is won), the instruction function is not activated and the system waits until the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1, and the transition is made to RT2, the instruction function is activated in the same manner as described above.

The advantageous section control means 69 is means for executing transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determining whether or not to end an advantageous section, adding on an advantageous section, controlling the operation of an instruction function, etc. be. First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and non-internal medium game. Further, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to add the number of games played in the advantageous section in an advantageous section and non-internal medium game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, when a specific condition device is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, whether or not to shift to the advantageous zone during the normal zone is determined at the same time. Decide to migrate. In addition, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, it is limited to when the vehicle is not inside the vehicle, and it is not decided to shift from the normal zone to the advantageous zone during the interior.

Furthermore, as described above, when determining the transition to the advantageous section according to the lottery result (winning conditional device), it is not possible to make the winning of a conditional device with a setting difference a condition. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the normal section may be shifted to the advantageous section on the condition that a condition device with common settings is won.

As shown in FIG. 17, for example, when winning 1BBA alone, there are cases where it is decided to move to the advantageous section and cases where it is not decided to move. When a random value included in the range of the number "20" is extracted from the number "30" assigned to the single winning of 1BBA, it is decided to move to the advantageous section and the number "10" is selected. When a random value included in the range is extracted, it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. The same applies to the individual winnings of "1BBA+minor win D", "1BBA+minor win E1", and minor win E1.

Further, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. In addition, when these conditional devices are won, instead of uniformly adding advantageous sections, it is also possible to conduct an additional lottery, or to decide whether or not to conduct an additional lottery. However, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, advantageous sections are added uniformly.

When it is decided to shift to an advantageous section in the normal section, an advantageous section with a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the number of games played, end conditions other than the number of games played (for example, the number of paid out pieces, the number of difference pieces, the number of wins of the small role B group, the number of times the instruction function is activated, etc.) may be set. good. In this embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, the game moves to the advantageous section where the ending conditions are set as shown below. Specifically, for example, it may be defined as follows. When winning 1BBA alone (number "20"): The initial value is counted from the end of the 1BB game and moves to the advantageous section of 100 games When winning 1BBA + small role D multiple times (number "5"): The initial value is 1BB Counting from after the end of the game and moving to an advantageous area of 250 games When winning 1BBA + small winning combination E1 repeatedly (number "20"): The initial value is counting from the end of the 1BB game and moving to an advantageous area of 200 games Small When wining D alone (set number "50"): Advantageous section with initial value of 150 games When winning small role E1 alone (set number "250"): Advantageous section with initial value of 100 games, or one small win Any of the advantageous sections that end with the activation of the instruction function when winning group B (which one may be decided by lottery).Alternatively, out of the number "250", it is included in the range of "120". When extracting a random value, the initial value is 100 and the advantageous area of the game, and when extracting a random value included in the range of the set number "130", the instruction function when winning one small role B group is used. (It may also be an advantageous section that ends with activation)

Incidentally, since the probability of winning small win D is lower than the probability of winning small win E1, in order to create a sense of premium when winning small win D, the number of times to play in the advantageous zone when small win D is won is set to be greater than when small win E1 is won. The number of times to play in the advantageous zone when small win E1 is won may also be set to be greater than when small win D is won. Also, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during an advantageous zone, for example, when 1BBA is won alone, the number of times to play in the advantageous zone is added by "30", when small win E1 is won alone (number of places "250"), the number of times to play is added by "50", when small win E1 is won alone (number of places "750"), the number of times to play is added by "20", and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal zone, when the small win E1 is won alone, it is determined that there is a probability of 1/4 (250 out of a total of 1000) of transitioning to the advantageous zone. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small win E2 alone is set higher in setting 6 than in setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of middle-tier cherries, but the probability that it will be decided to shift to the advantageous section when a middle-tier cherry appears is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6. That is, even though there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to move to the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference. In addition, contrary to this embodiment, setting 1 may be higher than setting 6 regarding the individual winning probability of the small winning combination E2 in FIG. In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the probability that a middle-tier cherry will appear, but the lower the probability that it will be decided to move to the advantageous section when a middle-tier cherry appears. Also, during the advantageous section, if the small win E1 alone is won, the advantageous section will always be added. On the other hand, when the small win E2 alone is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of middle-tier cherries, but the probability that an advantageous section will be added when a middle-tier cherry appears is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6. Therefore, even though there is no setting difference in the probabilities of adding up advantageous sections, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference.

In addition, 1BBA is a special role with a common setting for the winning number (excluding overlapping wins of 1BBA and small role D), and 1BBB is a special role with a setting difference in the winning number. In this case, when 1BBA, which has a common setting, is won during the favorable zone and 1BBA is in operation, it is possible to add to the favorable zone while 1BBA is in operation. In contrast, when 1BBB, which has a setting difference, is won during the favorable zone and 1BBB is in operation, it is stipulated that the favorable zone cannot be added while 1BBB is in operation. When 1BBA and small role D, which have a setting difference, are won during the favorable zone and 1BBA is in operation, it is stipulated that the favorable zone cannot be added while 1BBA is in operation.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared during 1BBA operation, the winning probability of small winning combination A is lower in setting 6 than setting 1, and the winning probability of small winning combination E2 is lower in setting 6 than setting 1. higher than For this reason, the condition for ending the 1BBA operation is set to a payout of more than 150 coins, so the number of games (expected value) during the 1BBA operation is greater in setting 6 than in setting 1. Therefore, for example, if you set it to add on the advantageous section when winning Replay D, the expected value of the number of times you win Replay D while 1BBA is active will be higher in setting 6 than in setting 1, so the higher the setting It is possible to make it easier for advantageous sections to be added.

Furthermore, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number during the operation of 1BBA, the advantageous zone may be set to be added. As described above, the expected value of the number of games during the operation of 1BBA is greater in setting 6 than in setting 1. As described above, the condition for terminating the operation of 1BBA is set to be that more than 150 coins are paid out. Meanwhile, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game during the operation of 1BBA is about "8.664" coins in setting 1 and about "8.557" coins in setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of games until the number of coins paid out reaches 150 coins is about "17.3" in setting 1 and about "17.5" in setting 6. Therefore, if it is determined that the advantageous zone is to be added unconditionally when the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during the operation of 1BBA, the higher the setting value, the easier it is to add the advantageous zone. Furthermore, when the operation of 1BBA is performed, the advantageous zone may be set to be added every time a certain number of games has passed. By doing this, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add on the advantageous zone.

On the other hand, since 1BBB is a special combination with a setting difference, it is not possible to add on advantageous sections while 1BBB is in operation. In addition, as shown in Figure 22, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, it shifts to non-RT, and when it shifts to non-RT, it stays in non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed, and when the pattern symbol is displayed. moves to RT2. That is, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, the process does not go through RT1.

In contrast, after 1BBB is activated, the game moves to RT1, and remains in RT1 until the pattern symbol is displayed. In RT1, Replay E is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 17, if it is RT1 during a favorable zone, the favorable zone is added when Replay E is won. This makes the probability of the favorable zone being added higher after 1BBB is activated than after 1BBA is activated. And by setting the number of plays of the favorable zone being added when Replay E is won to an appropriate value, it is possible to achieve a balance between after 1BBA is activated and after 1BBB is activated.

When the advantageous zone is maintained and the game transitions to RT1, the instruction function is not activated in games where the instruction function can be activated (for example, when the small win group B is won) until the pattern symbol is displayed, and the game waits until the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in RT1 and the game transitions to RT2, the instruction function is activated. When the advantageous zone is maintained and the game transitions to RT1, the instruction function is activated during the advantageous zone when the small win group B is won, and the pattern symbol is not displayed (unless there is a mistake in the push order). Therefore, when the game transitions to RT1 during the advantageous zone, the game can be made to stay in RT1 until the advantageous zone ends. The instruction function can be activated when the small win group B is won, not until the advantageous zone ends, but until a predetermined number of games, and after the predetermined number of games, the instruction function can be not activated in games where the instruction function can be activated (for example, when the small win group B is won), and the game waits until the pattern symbol is displayed.

Furthermore, when it is decided to move from the normal zone to the favorable zone, the favorable zone control means 69 controls the favorable zone display LED 77 to be lit by the arrival of a specified timing, and when it is not the favorable zone (normal zone or standby zone), controls the favorable zone display LED 77 to be turned off. First, when it is decided to move to the favorable zone, the favorable zone control means 69 controls the favorable zone display LED 77 to be lit until it becomes possible to insert medals (bet) for the next game after the end of the game in which it was decided to move to the favorable zone (after all reels 31 have stopped and, if there is a payout, after the medals have been paid out), and until it becomes possible to operate the settlement switch 46 (settlement processing operation) if there are stored medals.

Second, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that includes 1BB, which allows winning information to be carried over to the next game, by the time the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB stops, The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to light up. Therefore, if it is decided to move to an advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that includes a special prize, for example, the special prize is a special prize that carries over winning information to the next game, such as 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped (only when a standby section is provided).

On the other hand, when the special role is a special role such as SB or CB, which is only valid in the game in which it is won and does not carry over winning information to the next game, the advantageous zone display LED 77 must be lit until it is possible to insert medals (bet) for the next game and until it is possible to operate the settlement switch 46, just as when a transition to the advantageous zone is determined based on a win on a condition device that includes only minor roles and replays.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing timing 1 and timing 2 as timings for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77. In this embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 is set as follows: "From the time when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of the current game (all When the reels 31 stop and there is a payout, the medals for the next game can be inserted (bet) (after the medals are paid out) and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing will be referred to as "predetermined timing"). ), the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 for the next game is operated, the advantageous section starts. That is, in this embodiment, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game without knowing it after deciding to move to the advantageous section.

In FIG. 23, timing 1 indicates an example of this case. In this example, when the small winning combination E1 is won (singlely) and it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of the small winning combination E1, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. As in this example, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that does not include 1BB, which can be carried over to the next game or later, the winning information is always applied.

Second, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that includes 1BB, which can be carried over to the next game, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB will be displayed. By then, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is displayed is operated, the advantageous section starts. In this embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts. In FIG. 23, timing 2 shows an example of this case. In this example, if 1BBA and small winning combination E1 are won twice and it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on this double win, the advantageous section will be displayed by the time the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. Turn on LED 77. Therefore, as long as the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the lighting timing may be before that, for example timing 1 (this is the case where a standby section is not provided).

Therefore, when it is decided to move the winning information to the advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that includes a special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination will be uniformly displayed. It may be determined that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on when the vehicle is operated. Alternatively, even if the transition to an advantageous section is based on the winning of a conditional device that includes the special prize, it has been decided that the transition to the advantageous section will be based on the winning of a conditional device that does not include the special prize. Similarly, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing.

Alternatively, when it is decided that the winning information will be transferred to the advantageous zone based on the winning of a condition device that includes a special role that can be carried over to the next game or later, the timing of lighting may be determined by lottery or the like. Also, when it is decided that the winning information will be transferred to the advantageous zone based on the winning of a condition device that includes a special role that can be carried over to the next game or later, the timing of lighting may be determined at a time other than timing 1 and timing 2 shown in FIG. 23, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, during the rotation of at least a part of the reels 31, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether the role is a winning role or not), during the next game of the game in which the special role is won.

In that case, the advantageous zone will start when the start switch 41 is operated for the next game of that game (the waiting zone will end in the next game of the game in which the special role is won). In addition, it may be when the start switch 41 is operated in the next game of the game in which the special role is won and after, in a game in which it becomes possible to win that special role, while at least a part of the reels 31 are spinning, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether the role is won or not), etc. In that case, the advantageous zone will start when the start switch 41 is operated for the next game of that game (the waiting zone will end in the game in which it becomes possible to win that special role).

Here, for example, when the small win E1 is won, the 59th small win, "Red 7" - "Cherry" - "Red 7" (Fig. 9) can be stopped among the small wins 36. Then, assume that as a result of pinch-hitting in a game when 1BBA is won, "Red 7" - "Spinning" - "Red 7" stops. Next, if the player aims for "Cherry" when the middle reel 31 stops, but "Cherry" does not stop on the effective line (kick-off control is performed), it is understood that the small win E1 has not been won in that game. In this case, if the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player will know that 1BBA has been won alone, and it will be possible to press the combination of the symbols of 1BBA in the next game after the game when 1BBA is won. In other words, the lighting of the advantageous zone display LED 77 functions as a winning notification of 1BBA. This is because it is not determined to move to the advantageous zone when a miss occurs (when not won). Conventionally, when 1BB is won, there is a tendency to announce the winning of 1BB after a continuous performance (a performance teasing whether or not 1BB has been won), but if the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on by the specified timing, such continuous performance will be wasted. Therefore, when it is decided to move to the advantageous zone based on the winning of a condition device that includes 1BB that can be carried over to the next game, there are cases where the advantageous zone display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BB is won.

On the other hand, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + minor winning combination E1", if priority is given to winning the small winning combination E1 in the game, 1BBA will not be won in the game. On the other hand, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the single winning of the small winning combination E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (this is because a standby section cannot be provided). ). Therefore, if it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small prize E1", if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BBA is won, the minor prize E1 When winning a prize, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up by a predetermined timing, so that the player knows that 1BBA has not been won twice.

Therefore, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small winning combination E1", there are cases where the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), and a predetermined timing. A case (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) is provided in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has elapsed. For example, which one to use can be divided depending on the number placed at the time of winning "1BBA + Small win E1", or in the advantageous section when winning "1BBA + Small win E1" (limited to when it is decided to move to the advantageous section). An example of this is to conduct a lottery (two-stage lottery) to determine whether or not to turn on the display LED 77 immediately (or not to provide a waiting section). As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up by the predetermined timing, it does not mean that 1BBA has not been won twice, and the player's anticipation can continue to be aroused.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small win E1 is set to "PB = 1", so whether "1BBA + small win E1" is won or the small win E1 is won alone, the small win E1 (small win 36 or 38) will always win in that game. However, it is also possible to set the small win included in the condition device of the small win E1 to "PB ≠ 1". And when the small win included in the condition device of the small win E1 is set to "PB ≠ 1", if it is decided to move to the favorable zone when "1BBA + small win E1" is won, it is also possible to control so that when the small win E1 wins, the favorable zone display LED 77 is turned on by a specified timing, but when the small win E1 does not win, the favorable zone display LED 77 is not turned on even after the specified timing has passed.

However, not limited to the above, if it is decided to move to an advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that includes a special winning combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the advantageous section display LED 77 will always be displayed by a predetermined timing. (always at timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may not always be lit even after a predetermined timing (always at timing 1 shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

In addition, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section when winning the small role D alone or when winning the small role E1 alone, it is necessary to light up the advantageous zone display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (a standby section is provided). Therefore, the announcement becomes so-called instantaneous, and the players' expectations cannot be excited. Therefore, as mentioned above, when winning the small winning combination E1 alone, there are two advantageous sections: an advantageous section that continues until the predetermined number of games are played, and an advantageous section that ends when the instruction function is activated when a small winning combination B group is won once. Provide types. After turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, until the first winning of the small role B group, there is an effect that increases expectations (the final result is whether or not it is an advantageous section that continues until the predetermined number of games is played). If the player outputs a continuous performance (such as a continuous effect showing the game), even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations thereafter. This is because even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it is not known whether the advantageous section will continue until the predetermined number of games are played.

In addition, even when winning the small role E1 alone, if the winning section does not shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up in the first place, so there is no need to output continuous effects (such as effects that encourage whether or not to move to the advantageous section). do not have. In addition, when the above conditional device is won, instead of setting the winning of the small winning group B group once (one instruction function activation game) or a predetermined number of games, the instruction function when winning the small winning group B group is not set. It is also possible to determine the number of activations by lottery, for example within the range of 1 to 50 times.

As a specific process for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the 8th bit of the segment data for displaying digit 2 is changed from "0" to "1". Since the segment data for displaying digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, data obtained by ORing the previous segment data and "10000000" may be stored in the RWM 53 as new data. As a result, the value corresponding to segment DP in the segment data of digit 2 becomes "1".

Further, as described above, the digits of this embodiment include a total of nine digits 1 to 9, and a method for lighting these digits may be controlled as follows. The main control board 50 executes an "interrupt process" every 2.235 ms in addition to the "(game progress) main process" which is a process that is repeated every game, in parallel with this main process. In this interrupt processing, lighting control of the LED, driving control of the reel 31, transmission processing of an external signal, etc. are performed. In this embodiment, dynamic lighting is performed for digits 1 to 9, in which one digit is lit for each interrupt process. For example, in the current interrupt processing, only digit 1 is lit, and in the next interrupt processing, digit 2 is lit. By repeating this, one digit is lit once every nine interrupts. Note that the present invention is not limited to such dynamic lighting, and static lighting may be performed in which a signal line is connected for each digit.

Therefore, when it is time to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77, the segment data is changed as described above. After the change, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up when the lighting timing of digit 2 arrives due to the interrupt process.

In addition, in a game where the instruction function should be activated during the advantageous period, the advantageous section control means 69 activates the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80, which will be described later. Pressing order instruction information is displayed on the display LED 78. For example, when winning the small winning combination B1, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78. This control corresponds to "activation of the instruction function" in this embodiment.

The instruction function is activated during the advantageous period: 1) Non-RT and RT1: When the small role C group is won (when the small role B group is won, the instruction function is not activated because the pattern symbol is to be displayed). 2) RT2: When winning Replay B group, winning Small Role B group, and winning Small Role C group 3) RT3: When winning Replay C Group, winning Small Role B group, and winning Small Role C group. .

Furthermore, as described above, when the small winning combination A is won, the instruction function is activated as a dummy. When winning minor prize A, minor prize 01 will be won regardless of the order in which the keys are pressed, so no matter which order of presses is specified, the player will not be at a disadvantage, so even if a specific order of presses is displayed, the player will not be able to play the game. It will not harm the fairness of Specifically, when winning the small winning combination A, one of the push order instruction numbers "A1" to "A3" may be selected by lottery using random numbers or the like.

Further, if the small win E1 is won while approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 selects the push order instruction number "A3" and displays the push order of the right first stop. Thereby, it is possible to prevent middle-tier cherries from appearing when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the small winning combination E1 is won during the advantageous period, the advantageous period is added, and when the small winning combination E2 is won, the advantageous period is not added, so when the small winning combination E2 is won during the advantageous period, the winning period is always added. , displaying the first right stop so that the middle cherry is not displayed. In particular, since the advantageous section is always added when winning the small combination E1 in the advantageous section, the display of the middle cherry makes it possible to give the player the impression that the advantageous section is added. Therefore, if you do not want to display the middle cherry in a game where the advantageous section is not added (when winning the small winning combination E2), the right first stop is displayed.

Also, for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching (when it is not possible to add on the advantageous section), in order to prevent the middle cherry from being displayed, it is possible to determine whether the winning of the small winning combination E1 or the winning of the small winning combination E2. Also, when the instruction function is activated, the right first stop is displayed and the middle cherry is not displayed.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of plays in the advantageous zone is set to "1500 plays." Therefore, for example, when the number of plays from the start of the advantageous zone reaches "1400 plays" or more and a small win E1 (and E2) is won, the instruction function is activated to display the right first stop. As mentioned above, "activation of the instruction function" in this invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is advantageous to the player, but in this embodiment, the "activation of the instruction function" also includes the display of the push order that avoids the appearance of a middle cherry. Of course, such cases may not be included in the "activation of the instruction function," and the push order may be displayed only on the image display device 23.

In this embodiment, an advantageous section counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided as counters for counting the number of games related to advantageous sections (see FIG. 1). The advantageous section counter 69a sets an initial value of the number of games (for example, "100") determined at that time when it is decided to move to the advantageous section. Then, the count value is decremented every time one game is played, and when it reaches "0", the advantageous section ends. Incidentally, some decrementing is performed from the game that has shifted to the advantageous section, and some is performed after the 1BB game ends. Further, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter 69a does not need to set the initial value of the number of games decided at that time (for example, "100"), and after the 1BB game ends. It may also be something that sets an initial value. Further, when an advantageous section is added to the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

For example, when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is "55", it is decided to add an advantageous section, and the number of additional games is "30", the count value is changed from "55" to " 85”. Then, each time one game is played, the number is decremented by one game, such as "84", "83", etc.

Also, when 1BBA is in operation (excluding those based on duplicate winnings of 1BBA and small role D), the advantageous section counter 69a continues counting, but when 1BBB is in operation, the advantageous section counter 69a interrupts counting. The reason for this setting is that in this embodiment, while 1BBA is in operation (excluding those based on duplicate winnings of 1BBA and small role D), it is possible to add on advantageous sections, but when 1BBB is in operation, it is possible to add on advantageous sections. Since no add-on is performed, the above setting is made in order to maintain a balance between the two (so that 1BBB operation in the advantageous section is not more disadvantageous to the player than 1BBBA operation). However, the invention is not limited to this, and counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may continue even when either 1BBA or 1BBB is in operation, or the advantageous section counter 69a may continue counting even when either 1BBA or 1BBB is in operation. The counting by 69a may be interrupted.

On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous section, the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a continues until 1BBA or 1BBB is won, respectively (inside). Incidentally, when winning 1BB, or when it is announced that winning 1BB, counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be interrupted at that point. Even if the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is interrupted when you win 1BB, the remaining number of games in the advantageous section displayed on the image display device 23 will not change until you are notified that you have won 1BB. , may be decremented one game at a time.

It should be noted that there are cases where a conditional device including 1BB is won in the normal section (such as a duplicate winning of 1BBA and small winning combination E1), and the game shifts to an advantageous section based on the winning of this conditional device. In this case, the standby section will start from the next game (limited to cases where a standby section is provided) and will be within 1BB. On the other hand, when winning a conditional device in which 1BB is included in the advantageous section, the winning section will be within the advantageous section and 1BB, and no additional advantageous section will be added while the 1BB is within the advantageous section.

Therefore, if you have won a conditional device that includes 1BB in the normal section and have moved to the standby section, but have not yet moved to the advantageous section, a longer promotional performance (notifying you whether you have won 1BB or not) It is considered that even if the output is a continuous performance that spans a plurality of games, for example, it will not be disadvantageous to the player. This is because during the standby section, since it is not an advantageous section, counting (decrement) by the advantageous section counter 69a and counting (decrement) by the upper limit counter 69b, which will be described later, are not performed. On the other hand, if you win a conditional device in which 1BB is included in the advantageous section and it becomes an inside, even after it becomes an inside, the count (decrement) by the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b, which will be described later, are performed. is counted (decremented). In this case, since it is not possible to add on the advantageous section, it is preferable to notify the winning of 1BB at an early stage without performing an unnecessarily long promotion effect. Specifically, for example, the average number of games played for the former promotion effect is set to 4 games, and the average number of games played for the latter promotion effect is set to 2 games.

On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone and it is decided to move to the advantageous section where the instruction function is activated when winning the small winning combination B group once, in this embodiment, the advantageous section counter 69a is counted. Do not set the value. In this case, regardless of the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a, the advantageous section continues until the small winning combination B group is won. When winning the small prize group B and activating the instruction function, it is determined that the current game satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is ended.

In addition, when the number of activations of the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group is set in advance as the end condition of the advantageous section, a counter (decrement counter) that counts the number of games when the small role B group is won is provided, and this counter is It may also be set to "1". Then, when the instruction function is activated once when the small winning combination B group is won, the count value becomes "0" and it may be determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.

Furthermore, by providing something like an advantageous section flag and keeping it "on" during the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. However, in this embodiment, the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 serves as an advantageous section flag. As mentioned above, when it is determined that the end conditions of the advantageous section are satisfied in the current game, or when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes "0", the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 is "0". ”.

In addition, if you win the small prize E1 alone and decide to move to the advantageous section, you can either move to the advantageous section with a fixed number of games, or activate the instruction function when winning the small prize B group once. A lottery is held to determine whether to move to an advantageous section that will end (so-called fake advantageous section). Here, how to allocate probabilities between the former and the latter is arbitrary.

For example, when winning the small winning combination E1 alone and deciding to move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect is output to incite which advantageous section the shift has been made to. (It may be continued until the small winning group B is won). Next, if you win the small winning group B, after activating the instruction function in the game, if the advantageous section ends with one activation of the instruction function, the advantageous section will end with this game (advantageous section). (turn off the section display LED 77). On the other hand, when the game has entered the advantageous section for the predetermined number of games, the advantageous section continues after the next game (the advantageous section display LED 77 remains lit). In addition, in the above example, it is assumed that the small win group B is won before the predetermined number of games is played from the start of the advantageous section.

In addition, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting when the advantageous zone starts (it is set to "1500" when it is decided to move to the advantageous zone or at the start of the advantageous zone), and thereafter, under no circumstances is it interrupted from counting until the advantageous zone ends, and the count value is decremented by "1" for each game. In addition, the count continues even if, for example, 1BB is in operation. In this respect, it differs from the advantageous zone counter 69a. Note that the advantageous zone counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may increment the count value by "1" from "0" for each game.

Then, when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous zone control means 69 (forcefully) ends the advantageous zone in the current game (updates the count value of the advantageous zone counter 69a to "0") and turns off the advantageous zone display LED 77 (updates the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 to "0") even if the count value of the advantageous zone counter 69a exceeds "0". In this way, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is given top priority in the advantageous zone, and when the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous zone ends even if 1BB is in operation.

Further, during the advantageous period, it is necessary to execute an instruction function activation game at least once in which the number of coins to be paid out is 9 (the maximum number of coins to be paid out with the specified number of 3 coins). Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once when the small winning combination B group is won, but when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the small winning combination B group must be executed at least once. Even if you have not executed the instruction function activation game when winning the group, or even if you have never won the small role B group, the advantageous section will be (forced) ended in this game, and the advantageous section display LED 77 will be activated. Turn off the light. In addition, the remaining number of games, the number of used games, etc. may be displayed as an image on the image display device 23 by referring to the values of the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b.

In FIG. 1 , external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal to external centralized terminal board 100 . This external signal is a signal indicating the start of an advantageous section, the end of an advantageous section, the start of 1BB operation, the end of 1BB operation, or the like. The main control board 50 executes a game end check process every game, and updates the external signal control number at the time of this game end check process. In this embodiment, the "external signal control number" is a number that takes different values depending on the start of an advantageous section, the end of an advantageous section, the start of 1BB operation, and the end of 1BB operation.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated to a value corresponding to the external signal control number. After updating the external signal flag, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52. When this external signal is input to the external centralized terminal board 100, it is transmitted to the hall computer 200. The external signal is then output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the production output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80. The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of a first control command and a second control command. Further, the first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating parameters (variables).

For example, if the control command indicates RT, the first control command is "33 (H)" (00110011 (B)) in this embodiment. Also, the RT parameter is "00000001 (B)" in this embodiment when it is RT1. Therefore, the two-byte data "00110011/00000001" ("/" indicates the interval between the first and second control commands and does not actually exist) that combines these is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 as the RT control command. As with the RT above, the first control command is type data, and the second control command is data stored in the RWM 53 for the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous zone), performance group number, and role condition device number.

Note that the control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub-control board 80. For example, when the pressing order bell is won, there is a risk that the correct pressing order will be known based on the winning and replay condition device number due to fraudulent activity. On the other hand, with regard to accessory condition device numbers, there is no risk of fraudulent acts as described above. Therefore, for example, when winning 1BBA, the accessory condition device number "1" is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In addition, when a conditional device having a correct push order is won during an advantageous period, a push order instruction number corresponding to the correct push order is obtained and stored in the RWM53. In contrast, when a conditional device not having a correct push order is won during an advantageous period, the push order instruction number is not obtained or stored in the RWM53. Here, at the start of each game, the push order instruction number data in the RWM53 is cleared, but the data after clearing is "A0". Therefore, except when a conditional device having a correct push order is won during an advantageous period, the push order instruction number data in the RWM53 is "A0". In addition, even if a conditional device having a correct push order is won during a normal period or a standby period, the push order instruction number is not obtained or stored in the RWM53.

Then, when the conditional device having the correct pressing order is won during the advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits the pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. In addition, except when a conditional device having the correct pressing order is won during the advantageous period, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information of "A0" as the pressing order instruction number. Furthermore, the control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 when it is not in the advantageous section. Note that when it is not in an advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 may uniformly transmit the push order instruction number "A0", but in this embodiment, when it is not in an advantageous section, the control command transmission means 71 transmits the push order instruction number The number is not sent to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes a production output control means 91. As described above, the production output control means 91 controls each control command transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, the RT number, push order instruction number, production group number, accessory condition device number, etc. Based on the command, at what timing (when operating the start switch 41, when operating each stop switch 42, etc.) and what kind of effect to output (how to turn on, blink, or turn off the lamp 21) , what kind of sound to output from the speaker 22, what kind of image to display on the image display device 23, etc.), etc.) are determined by lottery.

Then, the effect output control means 91 controls the outputs of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation or during the advantageous period, the number of acquired coins, the number of games played (the number of remaining games or the number of games played), etc. are displayed as images. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when you win the small winning combination B1 in a game during the advantageous period and receive the control command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "A1", the correct pressing order is "Stop first on the left" or "1-○ -○, etc., so that the player can easily know the correct answer pressing order. Note that when the push order instruction number "A0" is received during the advantageous section, the push order is not notified.

Furthermore, although the production group number control command does not include information on which conditional device actually won, it can be said to include rough winning information. For example, when a control command corresponding to production group number "5" is received, the sub control board 80 cannot know which of the small winning combination A, small winning group B, or small winning group C has been won. . However, it is possible to know whether one of the small winning combinations A, B group, or C group has been won. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying a "bell" pattern or lighting a frame lamp in "yellow", which is the corresponding color of "bell".

Here, when the small winning combination A is won, no matter which order the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small winning combination 01 is always won, so immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switch It is possible to perform a bell (yellow) effect before the button is operated. On the other hand, when winning a small role B group or a small role C group during the normal period, the bell (yellow) effect can be performed when the winning of the small role 01 is confirmed, that is, after the first stop switch 42 is operated. preferable. Of course, it may be performed after the second stop switch 42 or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

However, if the output timing of the performance when the small role A is won is different from the output timing of the performance when the small role B group or the small role C group is won, based on the difference in timing, the output timing of the performance when the small role A is won is Since it is possible to determine whether the player has won or won the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group, it becomes possible to count the number of winnings of the small winning combination A, and in turn, it becomes possible to estimate the set value. Therefore, when winning the small role A in the normal section, the output of the bell effect starts at the same timing as when the press order is correct when winning the small role B group or the small role C group, for example, immediately after operating the first stop switch 42. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to determine which of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group has been won. In particular, in this embodiment, when winning one of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group, the control command corresponding to the same performance group number "5" is transmitted. . In this way, the performance group numbers of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group are set to be the same ("5"), and on the sub control board 80 side that has received the performance group number, for example, the first stop switch If the design is made so that the performance is output immediately after the operation of step 42, the performance group numbers for the small role A, small role B group, and small role C group can be set to be different (from "5" to "7"). (In the latter case, when any production group number from "5" to "7" is received, the production is output at the timing immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42, for example. (This is inefficient because the design must be designed to

24 and 25 show the timing of transmitting the control commands for the push order instruction number, production group number, and accessory condition device number, and the display of the push order instruction information (operation of the instruction function (on the main side) by the acquisition number display LED 78). 11 is a time chart showing notification of the correct press order by the image display device 23 (notification on the sub side). 24 and 25 show four examples 1 to 4. In FIGS. 24 and 25, first, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the winning combination lottery means 61 performs a lottery of conditional devices, and the performance group number corresponding to the winning conditional device is determined. Further, when the game is in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits control commands of a push order instruction number (only during advantageous sections), a performance group number, and an accessory condition device number to the sub control board 80. If the sub-control board 80 is in the advantageous section, it notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 is in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated to display push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number.

In "Example 1" of FIG. 24, when the push order instruction number is determined, first, the main control board 50 operates the instruction function to display the push order instruction information. After that, the push order instruction number is transmitted, and then the performance group number and accessory condition device number are transmitted. Next, upon receiving the accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, and notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. The display of the push order instruction information and the notification of the correct push order are both performed before the reels 31 reach constant speed rotation.

Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct pressing order is so-called 3 choices (first stop), the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated. We are planning to do so until the end. On the other hand, for example, when the correct pressing order is six options, the image display device 23 will not notify the correct pressing order until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. Note that even if the correct pressing order is so-called three choices as in this embodiment, it is of course possible to continue notifying the correct pressing order until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. be.

In this embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, a control command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 as described above, so the sub-control board 80 receives this control command. This allows it to be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. When the first stop switch 42 is operated, the image display device 23 ends the notification of the correct pressing order. Note that it goes without saying that effects other than the correct answer pressing order, such as image display (display of characters, etc.) unique to advantageous sections, may be continued.

Further, the push order instruction information is displayed by the winning number display LED 78 until the winning determination is made by the main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when there are three correct pressing orders as in this embodiment, the pressing order instruction information may be displayed until the first stop switch 42 is operated. After displaying the push order instruction information, the obtained number display LED 78 displays "00" (the upper and lower digits display "0"), "*0" (the upper digit is off (*), and the lower digit is "0"). 0"), "**" (the upper and lower digits are off), and "--" (both the upper and lower digits, only segment G is lit).

In "Example 2" of FIG. 24, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by activation of the instruction function, and then the production group Send the number and accessory condition device number. After receiving the production group number and accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct answer pressing order.

In addition, in "Example 3" of FIG. 25, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number, the performance group number, and the role condition device number, the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct push order on the image display device 23, and then, at the moment (or just before) when the reels 31 start to rotate at a constant speed, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information by activating the instruction function. In the above Examples 1 and 2, the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of push order instruction information) is activated earlier than the notification of the correct push order by the sub-control board 80. In contrast, in Example 3, the notification of the correct push order by the sub-control board 80 is activated earlier than the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of push order instruction information).

In "Example 4" in FIG. 25, the main control board 50 operates the instruction function (displays the push order instruction information) and the sub control board 80 notifies the correct press order at almost the same time. . When controlling in this way, for example, the instruction function is activated after "N" ms have passed since the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number or accessory condition device number to the sub control board 80 (the push order instruction The sub-control board 80 controls to start notifying the correct pressing order after "N" ms have passed since receiving the pressing order instruction number or accessory condition device number. This can be mentioned.

Although four examples are shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, it is preferable to activate the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) after the start switch 41 is operated and before the reel 31 starts rotating at a constant speed. It is also preferable for the sub-control board 80 to notify the push order after the instruction function is activated by the main control board 50. By setting it in this way, even if the main control board 50 sends an incorrect push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 or the sub-control board 80 notifies a push order different from the push order instruction number it received, the main control board 80 has already displayed the push order instruction information, so the player will notice the error in the notification by the sub-control board 80 and will not suffer any disadvantage. In addition, the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of push order instruction information) is activated until the winning determination is made, but it may be activated until the third reel 31 stops.

Next, the operation of the instruction function (display of press order instruction information) and the case of notifying the correct press order will be described in more detail. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating the flow of the game (flow from top to bottom in the figure), the display of the obtained number display LED 78, and a notification example of the image display device 23. Note that the example in FIG. 26 is the timing corresponding to "Example 1" in FIG. 24.

In the instruction function activation game during the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 activates the instruction function and displays push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78. The example in FIG. 26 shows an example in which the small winning combination B1 is won. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1", that is, "=1". Then, before the reels 31 reach constant speed rotation, the image display device 23 notifies the user of the correct pressing order. In the example of FIG. 26, "1○○" is displayed.

Next, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, when the pressing order is correct, the image display device 23 displays an effect that the pressing order is correct. Output (correct answer production). On the other hand, if the pressing order is incorrect, the image display of the correct pressing order is erased. In this embodiment, since the correct/incorrect pressing order is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42, the notification (image display) regarding the correct pressing order is terminated when the first stop switch 42 is operated. When there are six choices, the correct pressing order may continue to be notified until the second stop switch 42 or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

Further, in the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) continues to be displayed until a winning determination is made (the same applies to example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation of the instruction function (the display of the acquired number display LED 78) may be terminated when the incorrect pressing order is reached, similar to the notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device 23. . Further, as in this embodiment, when the correct pressing order is three choices, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the instruction is given (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order). The operation of the function may also be terminated.

However, it is desirable to end the operation of the instruction function after stopping the notification by the image display device 23. This is to avoid press order notification from being performed on the sub-control board 80 side even though the instruction function is not activated on the main control board 50 side. However, of course, the operation of the instruction function may be terminated at the same time as the notification by the image display device 23 ends, or the operation of the instruction function may be terminated before the notification by the image display device 23 ends.

Note that even if the pressing order is incorrect, it goes without saying that the image display device 23 may continue to notify the correct pressing order. However, if the image display device 23 stops notifying the press order when the press order becomes incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

When all the reels 31 stop, a winning determination is made. Here, when the small winning combination 01 is won and 9 medals are paid out, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 indicates that 9 medals have been paid out from the press order instruction information display "=1". It changes to "09" as shown. Note that when a one-card winning combination is won due to an error in the order of pressing, etc., "01" is displayed, and when the winning combination is missed, "00" (or "**") is displayed. In addition, between the display of the press order instruction information "=1" and the display of the number of medals to be paid out "09", "=1" → "00" (to reset the display, "00" is displayed. ) → may be displayed as “09”.

Alternatively, it may be displayed as "=1" → "**" (the upper and lower digits are turned off to reset the display once) → "09". Furthermore, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or inserts the medals and bets on them, the display content changes to "00" in order to clear the content of the winning number displayed on the winning number display LED 78. (You can also set it to "**".)

In FIG. 1, the management information control means 72 is a means for controlling (storing, calculating, displaying, etc.) the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74. In this embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is the following five items (see FIG. 38 described later): (1) advantageous zone ratio (cumulative); (2) consecutive feature ratio (6000 games (total of 15 sets)); (3) feature ratio (6000 games (total of 15 sets)); (4) consecutive feature ratio (cumulative); and (5) feature ratio (cumulative).

First of all, "advantageous section ratio (proportion of stay in advantageous section)" is the ratio of the advantageous section to the total gaming section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section) (the ratio of the stay in the advantageous section to the total gaming section). percentage). For example, in a game section where the number of games played is "10000", when the number of games played in the advantageous section is "7000", the advantageous section ratio is "70 (%)". Furthermore, in this embodiment, one set has a number of games of "400". Then, the total of 15 sets, that is, the number of games played "6000" is taken as the "total", and each ratio at the number of games played "6000" is calculated.

Furthermore, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of the numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, the purpose of counting is to reach at least "175,000" number of games. When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" number of games, the cumulative value is displayed, for example, by a flashing display, and when it is more than "175,000" number of games, the cumulative value is displayed, for example, by a lighting display. Even after the total number of games exceeds "175,000", it continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.

The "continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the first class special accessory (RB) is activated to the total number of medals acquired. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to the number of medals acquired during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of medals acquired. When the number of medals acquired at the time of activation of the "object (RB)" is "500", the "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games)" is "25 (%)".

Moreover, the "accessory object ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the accessory is activated to the total number of medals obtained. Here, "accessory objects" include, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special accessory objects, second-class special accessory objects (CB), 2BB (second-class accessory continuous operating device, CB operates continuously), SB (Single bonus) included. In this embodiment, since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided, the accessory ratio has the same value as the continuous accessory ratio.

27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modification of FIG. 29) are diagrams showing some storage areas of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. In the figure, the four-digit number starting with "F" indicates the address of the RWM 53. A 1-byte (8-bit) data buffer (storage area) is provided for each address.

First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer that stores data regarding advantageous sections. As information regarding advantageous sections, there are three storage areas: a value corresponding to the number of games played in advantageous sections, a total number of games played, and an advantageous section ratio. The storage area for the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is 4 bytes ("F004" to "F001"), the storage area for the total number of games played is 3 bytes ("F007" to "F005"), and the storage area for the number of games played in the advantageous section is 4 bytes ("F004" to "F001"). The storage area is 1 byte ("F008").

In this embodiment, the total number of games played is updated by adding "+1" each time one game is played. On the other hand, during the advantageous section, every time one game is played, a value obtained by multiplying the value of the number of games played in the advantageous section by 100 (referred to as "value corresponding to the number of times played in the advantageous section") is updated. Therefore, a 3-byte storage area is provided for the total number of games played, and a 4-byte storage area is provided for the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games.

In this embodiment, the total number of plays is intended to be stored as at least 175,000 or more. This is to display the advantageous zone ratio, consecutive feature ratio, and feature ratio when the total number of plays is 175,000 or more. Here, "175,000 (D)" is an 18-digit binary number, so it can be stored in 3 bytes with 24 digits.

Also, assuming that all of the total number of games "175,000 (D)" is in the advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is "175,000 x 100" (D), and this value is "25 digits" in binary. '', 3 bytes for 24 digits are not enough, but 4 bytes for 32 digits can be used. For the above reasons, the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes, and the storage area for the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is 4 bytes.

Regarding the total number of games played, "1" is added for each game played, but this is not limited to this, and a value other than "1" (value corresponding to the total number of games played) may be added. Good too. On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio has a maximum value of "100 (D)", the value has "7" digits in binary and can be stored in one byte of storage capacity.

The total number of games is updated every game, and when the 3-byte storage area reaches the upper limit (3-byte full, that is, "FFFFFF (H)", approximately 16.78 million in decimal), the total number of games is updated every game. The count ends at this point, and the number of games is not updated from the next game onward. The value corresponding to the number of games played in an advantageous section will add "+100" for each game during the advantageous section, but even if it is assumed that all games are in the advantageous section, the value of the total number of games played will be 3 bytes full. It is possible to count up to When the counting of the total number of games is finished, the counting of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is also finished.

The advantageous section ratio is a value calculated by "value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section/total number of games played" (actually, subtraction is performed, not division, as will be described later). Since the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played in the advantageous section by 100, the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. The main CPU 55 of this embodiment uses an assembler and cannot handle decimal points and cannot perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes, so the above calculation method cannot be adopted. This makes calculation possible. Further, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio is stored as an integer, and the fractions below the decimal point are rounded down. For example, when the total number of games played is "1100 (D)" and the value corresponding to the number of games played in an advantageous section is "56000 (D)," the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)," and "F008" contains " 00110010(B)" is stored.

Further, the advantageous section ratio can be updated every game, but for example, when there is a request to display the advantageous section ratio, the advantageous section ratio is calculated from the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of games played, It may be stored in "F008". Then, a decimal value based on the value stored in "F008" is displayed as an advantageous section percentage.

Figure 28 shows a buffer that stores data on the total number of coins paid out. When medals are paid out due to the winning of a minor role, the value stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53 is updated. As shown in Figure 28, a ring buffer is provided with 15 memory areas (01 set to 15 set) consisting of 2-byte data (for example, "F012 (higher digits)" and "F011 (lower digits)"). Each 2-byte data stores the number of coins paid out over 400 games. For example, when a 9-coin role is won and 9 coins are paid out, "9 (D)" is added to the total number of coins paid out. Here, in a slot machine according to regulations, the maximum number of coins paid out in one game is set to "15" or less, and if 15 coins are paid out each game, the number will be "6000" in 400 games. "6000 (D)" is 13 digits in binary, so it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Further, from the 1st game to the 400th game, when a payout is made, the number of coins paid out is stored in the 01st set ("F012" and "F011"). From the next 401st game to the 800th game, the payout number is stored in the 02nd set ("F014" and "F013"). In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) is provided for the total number of payout coins for a total of 15 sets (6000 games) ("F031" to "F02F" in FIG. 28). This storage area is for storing 15 sets, that is, the total number of coins paid out during 6000 games. Assuming that 15 coins were paid out in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store up to the value "90000 (D)", but since "90000 (D)" is 17 digits in binary, It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first 15th set, the total number of coins paid out in the number of games less than 6000 games is stored in "F031" to "F02F". When the 6000th game is reached, the number of paid out coins for 400 games is stored in all buffers from the 01st set to the 15th set (each 2 bytes), so the total number of paid out coins for the 15 sets (6000 games) is also stored. Also, the total value is for 6000 games. Next, when moving to the 6001st game, the 2-byte data of the 01st set ("F012" and "F011") is cleared, and the total number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is stored in this buffer. go. Note that from the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the total number of payout coins (3-byte data) of the total of 15 sets is maintained unchanged.

Then, when the 6400th game is reached and the addition to the 2-byte data of the 01st set is completed, the total number of coins to be paid out for the 15 sets is calculated (the 2-byte data of the 01st to 15th sets is added), and the calculated total number of coins to be paid out for the 15 sets is updated. As with the above, from the 6401st game onwards, when moving to the 6401st game, the 2-byte data of the 02nd set ("F014" and "F013") is cleared, and the total number of coins to be paid out from the 6401st game to the 6800th game is stored in this buffer. Note that the total number of coins to be paid out for the 15 sets is updated every 400 games in the above method, but it is also possible to calculate the total number of coins to be paid out for the 15 sets when all 15 sets have been replaced with new data, and update it to that value.

The total number of coins to be paid out (cumulative total) (“F034” to “F032”) is a 3-byte storage area that stores the cumulative number of coins to be paid out. The reason for calculating the cumulative number of payout coins is to calculate each ratio (such as the continuous accessory operation ratio described later) when the number of games is 175,000 or more. However, this cumulative number of payout coins continues to be stored even after 175,000 games have been played, and the update is finished when the 3-byte storage capacity reaches the upper limit (3-byte full). Assuming that 15 medals are paid out in every 175,000 games, the number is 22 digits in binary, so it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a buffer in the RWM 53 that stores data regarding the number of coins to be paid out regarding continuous accessories. As shown in FIG. 29, a ring buffer is provided with 15 storage areas each consisting of 3-byte data (for example, the 01st set is "F043 (most significant digit)" to "F041 (least significant digit)"). .

Then, in each 3-byte data, a value obtained by multiplying the number of medals paid out at the time of continuous accessory operation by 100 (referred to as a "value corresponding to the number of medals paid out") is stored. For example, when a 10-piece winning combination is won and 10 pieces are paid out during continuous role playing, "+1000" is added as the value corresponding to the number of paid-out pieces. Note that the reason for storing the value multiplied by 100 rather than the value of the number of paid out coins itself is the same as the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, and when calculating the continuous role object ratio described later, it is important to remember that the ratio is an integer. This is to ensure that the calculation is performed as follows.

Furthermore, each 3-byte data stores a value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out when the consecutive game features are activated for 400 games. Specifically, from the first game to the 400th game, if there is a payout number when the consecutive game features are activated, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 01st set ("F043" to "F041"). From the 401st game to the 800th game, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 02nd set ("F046" to "F044"). In this way, 400 games are counted as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set. Note that, assuming that 15 medals are paid out for each game over 400 consecutive games, the payout number corresponding value is "600000 (D)", which is 20 digits in binary and can be stored in 3 bytes.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) is provided for a value corresponding to the number of coins paid out when a total of 15 sets (6000 games) are activated in continuous accessory objects ("F070" to "F06E"). This storage area is a storage area for storing values corresponding to the number of payout coins for 15 sets, that is, 6000 games. Assuming that 15 medals were paid out in each game in 6000 games, the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out would be "9000000 (D)", and since this value is 24 digits in binary, it is 3 bytes. Memorable.

For example, up to the first 15 sets, "F070" to "F06E" store the payout number corresponding value when consecutive features are activated for a number of plays that is less than 6000 plays. Then, when the 6000th play is reached, all of the buffers for sets 01 to 15 (3 bytes each) store the payout number corresponding value for 400 plays. Also, the total payout number corresponding value when consecutive features are activated for 15 sets (6000 plays) is the total value for 6000 plays. Then, when the 6001st play is reached, the 3-byte data for set 01 ("F043" to "F041") is cleared, and the buffers store the payout number corresponding value when consecutive features are activated for the 6001st play to the 6400th play. In addition, from the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the payout value corresponding to the number of coins paid out when the consecutive features are activated for the total of 15 sets will remain unchanged.

Then, when the 6400th game is played and the 3-byte data of the 01st set is confirmed, the value corresponding to the number of coins paid out when the continuous accessory is activated for the total of 15 sets is calculated (each 3-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set is (addition), and update the value corresponding to the number of coins paid out when the continuous accessory is activated for the calculated total of 15 sets.

After the 6401st game, in the same way as above, when moving to the 6401st game, the 3-byte data of the 02nd set ("F046" to "F044") is cleared and the 6401st to 6800th games are stored in this buffer. Up to, the 3-byte data of the 02nd set is updated. In addition, the value corresponding to the number of coins paid out during continuous role play for the total of 15 sets is updated every 400 games with the above method, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, A value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out when the accessory is activated may be calculated and updated.

The cumulative value corresponding to the number of coins paid out during continuous accessory object activation ("F074" to "F071") is a storage area that stores the cumulative value corresponding to the number of coins paid out during continuous accessory object activation, and it is necessary to calculate the corresponding value of the cumulative number of paid out coins. This is to calculate the continuous accessory operation ratio when there are 175,000 games or more. However, the cumulative value corresponding to the number of coins paid out during continuous access point activation continues to be stored even after 175,000 games have passed, and the update is finished when the 4-byte storage capacity reaches the upper limit (4-byte full). Assuming that 15 medals continue to be paid out in every game, ``1500 (D)'' continues to be added every game, so 4 bytes can store up to about 2.86 million games.

The consecutive feature operation ratio (6000 games) ("F075") is a buffer that stores the value of the "value corresponding to the number of coins paid out when consecutive features are activated in 6000 games ("F070" to "F06E") / total number of coins paid out in 6000 games ("F031" to "F02F" in Figure 28).

The consecutive feature operation ratio (cumulative) ("F076") is a buffer that stores the value of the cumulative consecutive feature operation payout number corresponding value ("F074" to "F071") / cumulative total payout number ("F034" to "F032" in FIG. 28). The above ratios are stored up to the maximum value "100 (D)" in decimal, so they can be stored in one byte. The consecutive feature operation ratio (6000 games) and consecutive feature operation ratio (cumulative) can be updated every game, but for example, calculations can be performed when a display request for these ratios is made, and the calculation results can be stored in each memory area ("F075" and "F076") and the values can be displayed.

Figure 30 is a diagram showing a buffer in RWM 53 that stores data related to the number of coins paid out from reels. As is clear from comparing Figure 30 with Figure 29, a buffer that stores the corresponding value for the number of coins paid out from reels is also provided, just like the buffer that stores the corresponding value for the number of coins paid out from consecutive reels. The buffer that stores the corresponding value for the number of coins paid out from reels, etc., has the same configuration as the buffer that stores the corresponding value for the number of coins paid out from consecutive reels, etc.

In other words, it is equipped with 15 sets of memory areas capable of storing 3-byte data for each of 400 games as a value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out when the special feature is activated, a 3-byte buffer that stores the total value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out when the special feature is activated for 6000 games (15 sets), and a 4-byte buffer that stores the cumulative value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out when the special feature is activated. In addition, it is equipped with two types of buffers (1 byte) for storing the special feature activation ratio: one for 6000 games and one for the cumulative total. The method of storing data in each of these buffers is the same as when consecutive special features are activated, so explanation will be omitted.

In addition, since the continuous accessory corresponds to 1BB (including RB) of this embodiment, when medals are paid out during 1BB operation, it is stored in the value corresponding to the number of coins paid out during continuous accessory object operation shown in FIG. Furthermore, when medals are paid out during the operation of all the accessory objects including the continuous accessory objects, they are stored in the value corresponding to the number of coins paid out during the operation of the accessory object shown in FIG. Here, in this embodiment, only 1BB (and RB), which is a continuous accessory, is provided, so in such a case, the value stored in the buffer shown in FIG. 29 and the value stored in the buffer shown in FIG. The value stored in the buffer shown in is the same value.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modification of the ring buffer, and this example shows a modification of FIG. 29. In FIG. 29, a ring buffer consisting of 3 bytes each for the 01st set to the 15th set is provided, and the total value of the 15 sets is further stored. On the other hand, the example in FIG. 31 is similar to FIG. 29 in that the total value of 15 sets is calculated, but 16 sets are provided as a ring buffer.

In Figure 31, from the first game to the 6000th game, the payout number corresponding value is stored in each of the 3 bytes from set 01 to set 15, just like in Figure 29. Here, when you want to calculate the total payout number corresponding value from the first game to the 6000th game, you do so by adding up the 3-byte data from set 01 to set 15.

Next, the values corresponding to the number of payout coins from the 6001st game to the 6400th game are stored in the 16th set of 3-byte buffers ("F070" to "F06E"). Then, at the 6401st game, the 3-byte data of the 01st set ("F043" to "F041") is cleared, and the value corresponding to the number of payouts from the 6401st game to the 6800th game is changed to the 3-byte data of the 01st set. I will remember it.

When calculating the value corresponding to the total number of payout coins for the 6000 games (15 sets) between the 6401st game and the 6800th game, the 3-byte data for each of the 02nd set to 16th set are added together. Further, when the 6800th game is played, when calculating the value corresponding to the number of paid out coins for the total of 6000 games (15 sets), the 3-byte data for each of the 1st to 15th sets are added together. In this way, the 3-byte buffer of any one of the 16 sets is considered the 3-byte buffer currently being updated, and the value corresponding to the total number of payout coins for the 15 sets is calculated using the 3-byte buffer of the other 15 sets. Used when

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is not initialized only by turning the power switch 11 on and off, but is maintained. Furthermore, even when initializing a predetermined storage area (when clearing RAM) when changing settings, the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is an exception to the initialization, and data is maintained without being initialized. Ru. Here, in order to shift to the setting change mode, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 11 while the power switch 11 is off and the setting key switch 12 is turned on (rotated 90 degrees to the right). It becomes possible to migrate. Further, the above-described initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of setting change is executed before the setting value becomes changeable (setting change mode) based on the operation of the setting switch 13.

However, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the above data is initialized when the error is recovered. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the above data is not initialized and is maintained. Here, an "irrecoverable error" refers to a serious error that cannot be recovered from unless the power is turned off and an operation to switch to the setting change mode described above is performed. For example, there are the following: 1) when the loaded setting value is not within the range of settings 1 to 6 (abnormal setting value), 2) when a pattern that should not be displayed (kick-off pattern) is displayed as a result of determining the stopping pattern (abnormal pattern combination error), 3) when there is an abnormality in the update of the random number determined for each interrupt process, 4) when the power interruption recovery data is not a normal value, etc.

When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, a predetermined range of the RWM 53 (data in each buffer in FIGS. 27 to 30, setting value information, RT information, winning condition device information) is cleared. Then, the set value is set, and if there are no other errors, recovery processing is performed.

On the other hand, a "recoverable error" refers to an error that can be recovered without turning the power switch 11 on or off. Examples include a medal jamming error, a medal retention error, an incorrect medal passing error, an abnormality in the passage sensor 43a, an abnormality in the insertion sensor 44, an abnormality in the payout sensor 37, and an abnormal medal insertion error. When a recoverable error occurs, the error details are displayed and the main processing is stopped. However, when the hall clerk performs an error cancellation operation (removes the cause of the error) and operates the reset switch 14, it is possible to check whether the error has been canceled or not. If it is determined that the error has been resolved, the process is restarted.

Next, the process of updating the advantageous zone play count corresponding value and the total number of plays will be described. Note that in the flowcharts of Figures 32 to 37 below, the advantageous zone play count corresponding value is abbreviated as the "advantageous zone corresponding value." Figure 32 is an example of updating the advantageous zone play count corresponding value and the total number of plays using a register. Also, Figure 33 is a flowchart showing specific example 1 of the part surrounded by a dotted line in Figure 32, Figure 34 is a flowchart showing specific example 2 of the dotted line part, and Figure 35 is a flowchart showing specific example 3 of the dotted line part. Also, Figure 36 is an example of updating the advantageous zone play count corresponding value and the total number of plays without using a register.

FIG. 32 is executed every game, for example, at the end of the game. Furthermore, in the method using registers, in the chip of this embodiment, the A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) can be used during calculation. In particular, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section ("F004" to "F001") is 4 bytes, and the total number of games played ("F007" to "F005") is 3 bytes, so there is a total of 7 bytes, which can be used. The number of registers and the number of bytes match.

In FIG. 32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte of the total number of games (data "F007" in FIG. 27) is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower two bytes of the total number of games (data "F006" and "F005" in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register. Furthermore, in step S103, the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (data "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27) are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, the lower two bytes (data "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27) of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the lower two byte register of the total number of games played, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether an overflow has occurred in the lower two bytes of the total number of games played by adding "1" in step S105. For example, if the data in the lower 2 bytes is "FFFF (H)" before the start of this flowchart, an overflow will occur due to the addition of "1" in step S105 (the flag register (F register )'s carry flag becomes "1"). If it is determined that an overflow has occurred, the process advances to step S107, and if it is determined that an overflow does not occur (carry flag≠"1"), the process advances to step S109. Note that after adding "1" in step S105, it is determined in step S106 whether an overflow has occurred, so at the time of step S106, the DE register value when an overflow occurs is "0". ”. Note that in this embodiment, the "0" bit of the F register (flag register) is set as a carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when a downflow or a carry (also referred to as overflow) occurs as a result of an operation using a register.

In step S107, "1" is added to the upper 1 byte register of the total number of games played, that is, the value of the A register in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, the "upper limit" means the upper limit of the count. The total number of games played in this embodiment is counted in 3 bytes, so when 3 bytes are full, specifically when the value becomes "FFFFFF(H)", no further additions can be made. , determines that the upper limit has been reached. Note that after adding "1" to the A register value in step S107, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached only when an overflow occurs in the A register value (when the carry flag = "1"). be. Note that this can also be expressed as when the A register value becomes "0" (when the zero flag = "1"). When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the processing according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

Therefore, when the total number of games in this embodiment becomes 3 bytes full, or approximately 16.78 million times in decimal notation, the total number of games is not added any further. However, even when 3 bytes are full, the flow shown in FIG. 32 is executed every game, but every game, it is determined as "Yes" in step S108, and this flowchart ends.

When the process advances from step S106 or step S108 to step S109, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous period. Furthermore, by providing an advantageous section flag that is turned on when the game is in an advantageous section and determining whether the advantageous section flag is on or off, it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, by determining whether the 8th bit of the segment data of digit 2 is "1", it is possible to determine whether or not it is in an advantageous section. It is. When it is determined in step S109 that the game is in an advantageous period, the process proceeds to step S110, and when it is determined that it is not in the advantageous period, the process proceeds to step S114 without updating the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous period.

In step S110, "100 (D)" is added to the lower 2-byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the HL register value in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S111, and it is determined whether overflow has occurred. In this embodiment, during the advantageous section, "100 (D)" is added in increments, so the overflow occurs at 2 bytes because "100 (D)" is added to "FFDC (H) (65500 (D))". )" is added and becomes "0040(H)(65600(D))". When it is determined that overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112, and when it is determined that overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S112, "1" is added to the upper two byte register of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register in this example. Then, the process advances to step S113, and the updated BC register value and HL register value are written in "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27. As a result, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (RWM53) is updated. Furthermore, in the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written into "F007" to "F005" in FIG. As a result, the total number of games played (RWM53) is updated. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the flowchart of FIG. 32, the value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone will not reach the full four bytes before the total number of plays reaches the full three bytes. As described above, the total number of plays can be counted to be approximately 16.78 million plays, but even if the total number of plays is assumed to be all in the advantageous zone and the value of approximately 16.78 million is multiplied by 100, it will not reach the full four bytes. For this reason, even if "1" is added to the upper two byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone in step S112, it is possible to achieve correct calculation processing without having to determine whether an overflow has occurred, and it is also possible to simplify the calculation processing.

In addition, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, calculations are executed by setting (copying) each data of the RWM 53 to the register, and when it is determined in step S108 that the total number of games has reached the upper limit, the total number of games is The processing according to this flowchart ends without returning the set register value to the RWM 53. Therefore, the total number of games stored in the RWM 53, that is, the 3-byte data stored in "F007" to "F005" of the RWM 53 remains "FFFFFF (H)", and the RWM 53 There is no change in the data on the total number of games played.

Next, a specific example of the processing in steps S109 to S114 in FIG. 32 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the steps during this period. In FIG. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. 32. Note that in FIG. 33, if the determination in step S109 is "No", the process advances to step S123.

After step S112, when the process proceeds to step S121, the value of the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written to "F004" and "F003" in FIG. In the next step S122, the value of the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written to "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27. Next, in step S123, the total number of games played is updated at once by three bytes. Specifically, the A register value and the DE register value are written to "F007", "F006", and "F005" in FIG. 27, respectively.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a second specific example of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. In FIG. 34, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. 32. Note that in FIG. 33, if the determination in step S109 is "No", the process advances to step S123. After step S112, when the process advances to step S131, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated by 4 bytes at once. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are written to "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in FIG. 27, respectively. Then, when the process advances to step S123, the total number of games played is updated at once by three bytes, as in the first example.

Figure 35 is a flow chart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 in Figure 32. In Figure 35, when the answer is "No" in step S109, the process proceeds to step S141. Each step in Figure 35 is the same as in Figure 34. The difference between Figure 35 and Figure 34 is that even if the answer is determined to be "No" in step S109, the process proceeds to step S131 and the advantageous zone play count corresponding value is updated. That is, in this case, the advantageous zone play count corresponding value is not incremented by "100 (D)", but is written to "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in Figure 27 based on the BC register value and the HL register value set in steps S103 and S104 in Figure 32. In this case, the same value as that in the previous game is written again.

The above examples in Figures 32 to 35 are examples in which the total number of plays and the value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone are updated via (using) a register. In contrast, Figure 36 is an example in which the total number of plays and the value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone are updated generally without using a register. In Figure 36, in step S201, "1" is added to the lowest two bytes of the total number of plays. Specifically, "1" is added to the data in "F006" and "F005" in Figure 27.

In the next step S202, it is determined whether an overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, by adding "1" to the data of "F006" and "F005", it is determined whether the carry flag has become "1". Note that the determination may be made based on whether the data of "F006" and "F005" become "0000(H)". If it is determined that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203, and if it is determined that an overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S203, "1" is added to the most significant byte of the total number of plays. Specifically, in FIG. 27, "1" is added to the data of "F007". In the next step S204, it is determined whether the total number of plays has reached the upper limit. This determination is made by determining whether the carry flag has become "1" due to an overflow in "F007" caused by adding "1" in step S203, and if the carry flag has become "1", it is determined that the upper limit has been reached. It may also be determined by determining whether the data of "F007" has become "0 (H)", and if it has become "0 (H)", it is determined that the upper limit has been reached. If it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the upper 1 byte of the total number of games played. When the process moves to step S205, an overflow also occurs for the upper 1 byte in the addition in step S203, and it becomes "0 (H)", so by subtracting "1" from this value, step S203 The data is returned to the data before adding "1", that is, "FF(H)". Next, the process advances to step S206, and "1" is also subtracted from the lower two bytes of the total number of games played. As a result, the values of "F006" and "F005" become "FFFF(H)". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when the process advances from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous period. This determination is similar to step S109 in FIG. 32. Then, when it is determined that the game is not in the advantageous period, there is no need to update the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous period, so the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the vehicle is in an advantageous section, the process advances to step S208. In step S208, "100 (D)" is added to the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, that is, "F002" and "F001" in FIG.
Add. Here, since the assembler cannot directly add the value "100 (D)" to the RWM 53, first, the data "F002" and "F001" are stored in the HL register. Then, the data of "F002" and "F001" are updated by storing the result of adding the value "100(D)" to the HL register in "F002" and "F001".

In the next step S209, it is determined whether or not overflow occurred in the calculation in step S208. Here, it is determined whether the carry flag has become "1" or not, and when the carry flag has become "1", it is determined that an overflow has occurred.

If it is determined in step S209 that overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210, and if it is determined that overflow has not occurred, the process according to this flowchart is ended. In step S210, "1" is added to the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, that is, "F004" and "F003" in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio will be explained. In this embodiment, the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of games played in an advantageous section are stored, so in order to calculate the advantageous section ratio, simply calculate the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section ÷ the total number of games played. It can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, a chip that satisfies the rules can only perform operations with 2 bytes, and cannot perform division of numerical values of 2 bytes or more. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the subtraction shown below.

Specifically, when the value corresponding to the number of games played in an advantageous section=x and the total number of games played=y, "x÷y" can be calculated by repeating the following subtraction. x-y=a(>0) a-y=b(>0) b-y=c(>0) c-y=d(<0) In this way, the result of repeatedly subtracting the total number of games y is , the number of times ">0 (greater than "0")" is "3", so the quotient of "x÷y" can be calculated to be "3". In this embodiment, the fractions below the decimal point are rounded down, so in the above example, the advantageous section ratio is calculated as "3".

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio. First, in step S301, data of the RWM 53 is acquired into a register. Note that, similarly to the above, seven registers A, B, C, D, E, H, and L are used. In this step S301, each data "F001" to "F007" shown in FIG. 27 is stored in a register. Specifically, it is as follows. A register: Stores the data of "F007" D register: Stores the data of "F006" E register: Stores the data of "F005" B register: Stores the data of "F004" C register: Stores the data of "F003" H register: Stores the data of “F002” L register: Stores the data of “F001”

Next, the process proceeds to step S302, where the advantageous section ratio (RWM53) is initialized. This process clears the data stored in "F008" in FIG. 27 (to "0"). The process then proceeds to step S303, where the lower byte is subtracted. This process subtracts the data stored in the DE register (lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played) from the data stored in the HL register (lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section), and calculates the calculation result. Store in HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S304, and it is determined whether a downgrade has occurred. If the result of the calculation in step S303 (result of subtracting the DE register value from the HL register value) is that the carry flag is not set (carry flag≠“1”), the determination is “No”. If it is determined that the carry flag has been set (there is a negative digit), the process advances to step S305, and if it is determined that there is no negative digit, the process advances to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register value, is "0". If it is "0", then subtraction cannot be performed after that, so the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "0", the process advances to step S306. In step S306, "1" is subtracted from the upper byte of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the BC register value and the calculation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, subtraction of the upper bytes is performed. Specifically, the A register value (the upper byte of the total number of plays) is subtracted from the BC register value (the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone), and the calculation result is stored in the BC register. Then, the process proceeds to step S308, where it is determined whether the calculation result in step S307 is less than "0", that is, whether the carry flag has been set by the calculation in step S307. If the carry flag has been set, the determination in step S308 is "Yes", and since no further subtraction can be performed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S308 is "No", the process proceeds to step S309. In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (part of the memory area of RWM53).

In the next step S310, the data (advantageous section ratio) stored in "F008" is stored in the HL register, and "1" is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. The process then proceeds to step S311, and the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303 and the above process (subtraction) is repeated. Through the above processing, the total number of games is subtracted from the value corresponding to the number of times of advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio is added by "1" for each subtraction. Therefore, after the process shown in FIG. 37, the advantageous section ratio calculated from the value corresponding to the number of games played in advantageous sections and the total number of games stored in "F001" to "F007" is stored in "F008". Note that, as is clear from the above, each time the processing in steps S303 to S311 in FIG. 37 is executed, the advantageous section ratio is added by "1". In other words, the number of times steps S303 to S311 are executed (the number of repetitions) becomes the advantageous section ratio.

In addition, in the above, the quotient of the value corresponding to the number of games played in an advantageous area (the value obtained by multiplying the number of games played in an advantageous area by 100) and the total number of games was calculated and used as an advantageous area ratio (%), but a method similar to this calculation method is used. By (repeating subtraction), calculate the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), and the accessory ratio (cumulative) be able to.

Specifically, the values correspond to the number of coins paid out during continuous role object activation in 6000 games (15 sets) ("F070" to "F06E" in Figure 29) and the total number of coins paid out in 6000 games (15 sets) (in Figure 28). , "F031" to "F02F"), by repeating the same subtraction as above, calculate the quotient of "value corresponding to the number of coins paid out during continuous accessory activation in 6000 games ÷ total number of coins paid out in 6000 games", and The value is stored in "F075" in FIG. 29 as a continuous accessory action ratio (6000 games).

In addition, from the cumulative total number of coins paid out during continuous accessory activation ("F074" to "F071" in Figure 29) and the total number of coins paid out ("F034" to "F032" in Figure 28), " Calculate the quotient of the cumulative number of coins paid out when the continuous accessory is activated ÷ the total number of coins paid out, and store the value in "F076" in FIG. 29 as the continuous accessory activation ratio (cumulative total).

Similarly, from the value corresponding to the number of coins paid out when the accessory is activated in the 6000 game ("F0B0" to "F0AE" in Figure 30) and the total number of coins paid out in the 6000 game ("F031" to "F02F" in Figure 28), , calculate the quotient of "corresponding value to the number of coins paid out when the accessory is activated in the 6000 game ÷ the total number of coins paid out in the 6000 game", and store the value in "F0B5" in FIG. 30 as the accessory activation ratio (6000 game). .

In addition, from the value corresponding to the cumulative number of coins paid out when the accessory is activated ("F0B4" to "F0B1" in Figure 30) and the total number of coins paid out ("F034" to "F032" in Figure 28), the "cumulative total The quotient of the corresponding value of the number of coins paid out when the accessory is activated ÷ the cumulative total number of coins to be paid out is calculated, and the value is stored in "F0B6" in FIG. 30 as the accessory activation ratio (cumulative total).

Figure 38 shows the "advantageous section ratio", "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", "accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", "continuous accessory ratio", and "continuous accessory ratio" calculated as described above. It is a figure showing an example of a display of "ratio (cumulative total)" and "accessories ratio (cumulative total)." These five pieces of information are displayed by information type and numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74. Note that the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are just examples, and the information is not limited to these. Information other than these may also be displayed, or some of the information shown in FIG. 38 may be displayed. Only information may be displayed. Furthermore, the display is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The reason for displaying the management information as above is as follows. Only gaming machines that pass the model test set out in the Entertainment and Amusement Act are allowed to be installed in halls. The model test includes a provision that states that the ratio of special features and the ratio of consecutive special features after 6,000 plays must not exceed a specified value (70% for the ratio of special features and 60% for the ratio of consecutive special features). In addition, when model testing is conducted, a document stating the average ratio of special features and the ratio of consecutive special features of the gaming machine applied for must be attached (in the future, it may be required to state the average ratio of advantageous zones as well).

In this case, it is desirable to enable hall staff or third parties to easily check whether the gaming machines installed in the hall are of the same specifications as the compatible machines (whether there has been any fraudulent activity). For example, a gaming machine that shows numbers that deviate from the compatible gaming machines may not be the compatible gaming machine, and in this case, fraud can be confirmed early by requesting the manufacturer to check the gaming machine. Therefore, by providing a function to calculate and display management information as in this embodiment, it becomes possible to easily and reliably check whether the machine matches the compatible ones.

In this embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (thereby turning on the door switch 15), the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. . This state is what is called setting confirmation. Therefore, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Note that while checking the settings is different from changing the settings, the setting value will not be changed even if the setting switch 13 is operated.

In this embodiment, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once during this setting confirmation, the "advantageous section ratio" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 in FIG. First, digits 6 and 7 indicate the information type. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as "U7". Further, in this example, it is assumed that the advantageous section ratio is "50 (%)", and "50" is displayed in digits 7 and 8. Therefore, "U750" is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9). Note that when displaying the numerical value of the management information, it is expressed in decimal notation.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, "Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, "y6" is displayed as the type of this information, and in this example, the ratio is "45". (%)” is displayed. Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, "Accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, "y7" is displayed as the type of this information, and in this example, the ratio is "60 (%)". )” is displayed.

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, the display changes to "Continuous feature ratio (cumulative)", the type of this information is displayed as "A6", and in this example, the ratio is displayed as "48 (%)". Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, the display changes to "Feature ratio (cumulative)", the type of this information is displayed as "A7", and in this example, the ratio is displayed as "52 (%)". Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display returns to the initial display, and the advantageous zone "U750" is displayed. In addition, the display of the management information may be turned off if the setting switch 13 is not operated for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). After the display is turned off, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the first display, the advantageous zone ratio "U750", is displayed.

Further, while the door switch 15 detects that the front door is opened, the management information continues to be displayed (each digit 6 to 9 continues to be lit), and the door switch 15 detects that the front door is closed. In this case, digits 6 to 9 may be turned off. In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section "U750" may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 or the setting switch 13 is turned on; If only the opening of the front door is detected, the digits 6 to 9 are not turned on, but when the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on, the advantageous section "U750" may be displayed.

Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, after the power switch 11 is turned on, the interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined period (for example, every 3 seconds (for example, every 1500 interrupts). )) The display contents described in FIG. 38 may be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74. Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information whose ratio depends on a set value such as a continuous accessory ratio. On the other hand, when the hall is open (when players can play), the front door is likely to be opened due to a) an error that occurs when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty; b) ) An error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the medal selector; c) An error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the payout port of the hopper 35; d) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medals have accumulated in the hopper 35. Examples include errors that occur when the sub storage provided next to the hopper 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper 35 is full (both errors belong to the above-mentioned recoverable errors).

If a hall official opens the front door when such an error occurs, there is a risk that the management information will be viewed by the player and the set value may be guessed. In order to solve this problem, when all the errors from a) to d) above or at least one of the errors from a) to d) occur, the management information display LED 74 does not light up. It is desirable to configure it so that the light turns off. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the errors a) to d) mentioned above, and it is possible to configure the management information display LED 74 not to display the lighting display even when other errors occur. In addition, if the above-mentioned unrecoverable error occurs, there may be doubts about the authenticity of the management information to be displayed, and after resolving the unrecoverable error, the data underlying the displayed management information must be cleared. Therefore, it is desirable not to display it.

Note that in order to view the management information displayed on the main control board 50, the front door must be opened, and opening the front door will always result in a door open error, but management can be done by operating the various switches described above. It is okay to display information.

In addition, the above information types "U7", "y6", "y7", "A6", and "A7" are examples, and any display may be made using two-digit alphabets, symbols, numbers, or a combination thereof. be able to. In addition, in the above example, a numerical example is shown in which the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio are different, but when there is only a continuous accessory as in this embodiment, the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio are the same value. becomes.

In addition, when performing the above display, for example, when the door switch 15 is turned on, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and the setting switch 13 is turned on, the mode shifts to the management information display mode and "U7 (advantageous section The segment data for displaying "Ratio)" is read and displayed in digits 6 and 7. Specifically, if "U7" is displayed, the segment data will be "00111110(B)" and "00100111(B)."

Furthermore, when displaying a numerical value, for example, if it is an advantageous section ratio, the data of "F008" in FIG. 27 mentioned above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)", the data stored in "F008" is "00110010". When that value is converted into segment data, it becomes "01101101(B)" and "00111111(B)."

Further, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the total number of games played ("F007" to "F005") is read and it is determined whether the total number of games played has reached "175,000 (D)". When it is determined that the total number of games has not reached "175,000" games, the numerical value of the advantageous section percentage is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games has reached "175,000" games, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed by lighting up. In this way, the display pattern is changed depending on whether the total number of games has reached "175,000 games" or not.

Specific examples of blinking include displaying in a pattern that repeats turning off and turning on at intervals of 0.5 seconds, or repeating a turn-off time of 0.5 seconds and a turn-on time of 1 second. An example of this is to display it in a pattern. Compared to setting the lights-off time and lights-on time to the same time, setting the lights-on time longer than the lights-off time allows for a longer display time of management information, and also makes the lighting in halls etc. dim. Visibility can be improved even under certain conditions. In addition, since it is sufficient to change the display pattern so that it is possible to determine whether or not the game has reached "175,000", it is not limited to flashing or lighting; for example, the display of the information type "U7" can be changed to "U7" (" 175,000" games or more), for example, "U1" (less than "175,000" games) may be displayed. Alternatively, when the number is less than "175,000" games, "U7" may be displayed blinking, and the numerical value may be displayed lit.

Similarly to the above, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) and the accessory ratio (6000 games), if the total number of games has not reached "6000" games, the continuous accessory ratio and Displays the numerical value of the role item ratio blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached "6000" games, the numerical values of the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio are displayed by lighting. Therefore, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) and the accessory ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. It is read and it is determined whether or not the number of games has reached "6000", and the display pattern is changed depending on the result.

Furthermore, in the same way, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) and the accessory ratio (cumulative total), if the total number of games has not reached "175,000" games, the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) and the accessory ratio (cumulative total) are displayed. The numerical value of the accessory ratio (cumulative total) is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached "175,000" games, the numerical values of the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) and the accessory ratio (cumulative total) are displayed by lighting up. Therefore, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) and the accessory ratio (cumulative total), read the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. It is determined whether the target value has been reached, and the display pattern is changed depending on the result.

In particular, by displaying the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio in such a way that it is possible to distinguish whether or not there are 6,000 games or more, and whether or not there are 175,000 games or more (by changing the display format, etc.) , has the following advantages. For example, when determining whether or not a gaming machine is fraudulent based on the management information of the currently displayed advantageous section ratio, continuous character object ratio, and character object ratio, the number of games played by the management information is determined. By referring to whether the game machine is an illegal gaming machine or not, it becomes possible to more accurately judge whether or not the gaming machine is an unauthorized gaming machine.

For example, assume that the design value (average value) of the advantageous section ratio was 55 (%) at the time of application for the model of the gaming machine. At this time, for example, the determination of whether or not it is fraudulent will be different depending on when the advantageous section ratio is 80 (%) for 1000 games and when the advantageous section ratio is 80 (%) for 175,000 games or more. . It is quite possible that the value of the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games has not converged yet. On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio in 175,000 games is a value for a sufficient number of games, it is considered that the value has converged. Therefore, it can be determined that the latter is more likely to be fraudulent.

In this way, even if the values are the same, the greater the number of games played, the more the value converges to the designed value, so if you combine the number of games played and the number to determine whether or not it is an illegal gaming machine, You can make more accurate judgments. As mentioned above, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175,000 games), the display is blinking, and when it has reached the predetermined number of games, the display is lit, but this is different. Conversely, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be lit up, and when the number of games has reached the predetermined number, the display may be blinking.

Further, in the above example, digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 and the management information display LED 74 is provided, but the management information may also be displayed using, for example, the storage number display LED 76 or the acquisition number display LED 78. It is possible. With this setting, there is no need to separately provide digits 6 to 9, resulting in cost reduction.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the storage number display LED 76. The example in FIG. 39 shows an example in which nine medals are used as credits. Therefore, initially, the display on the storage number display LED 76 is "09". Even when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, the display on the storage number display LED 76 remains unchanged (because a door open error is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, which will be described later).

When the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the storage number display LED 76 displays "U7" indicating the advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, "50", which is the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left unattended, "U7" and "50" will be displayed alternately every two seconds.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the LED 76 for displaying the number of reserved reels will display "y6", indicating that the reel is in the "sequential reel ratio (6000 plays)". After the above-mentioned fixed time has elapsed, the value "45" for the "sequential reel ratio (6000 plays)" will be displayed. As with the above, if this state is left as is, the display will alternate between "y6" and "45" every two seconds. Note that in the example of Figure 39, an arrow is shown to transition from the display of "50" to the display of "y6", but of course pressing the setting switch 13 while "U7" is displayed will also result in the display of "y6" (this is also true for the other figures).

In addition, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y6" or "45" is displayed, "y7" is displayed on the storage number display LED 76, indicating that the "accessories ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. When the above-mentioned certain period of time has elapsed, the numerical value "60" of "accessory object ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Similarly to the above, if this state is left unattended, "y7" and "60" will be displayed alternately every two seconds and will be repeated.

Furthermore, if the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y7" or "60" is displayed, "A6" indicating the "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed on the storage number display LED 76. , when the above-mentioned certain period of time has elapsed, the numerical value "48" of "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed. Similarly to the above, if this state is left unattended, "A6" and "48" will be displayed alternately every two seconds. Similarly, if the setting switch 13 is pressed while "A6" or "48" is being displayed, the stored number display LED 76 will display "A7" indicating the "accessory ratio (cumulative)". , when the above-mentioned certain period of time has elapsed, the numerical value "52" of "Accessory object ratio (cumulative)" is displayed. Similarly to the above, if this state is left unattended, "A7" and "52" will be displayed alternately every two seconds and will be repeated.

If the setting switch 13 is further pressed in this state, the display returns to the initial advantageous section ratios "U7" and "50". When the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off while the above display is being performed, the display changes to "09" indicating the storage number.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the acquired number display LED 78. In the example of FIG. 40, "09" is displayed as the number of acquisitions. Then, when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. As a result, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "dE" indicating a door open error. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "U7" indicating an advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, "50", which is the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left unattended, "U7" and "50" will be displayed alternately every two seconds.

After that, similar to the example in Figure 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the specified management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, when the front door is closed and the door switch 15 is turned off, the error content "dE" is displayed again (the door open error is not resolved by simply closing the front door). Then, in order to resolve this error display, an error release operation is performed. For example, the error is configured to be released by inserting the door key into the keyhole in the front door and turning the door key counterclockwise. When the error release operation is performed in this way, the acquisition number display LED 78 again displays "09", the acquisition number before "dE" was displayed.

In the examples of Figures 39 and 40, when the consecutive feature ratio (6000 plays) and the feature ratio (6000 plays) are less than the total number of plays of "6000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is displayed in a flashing manner. Similarly, when the consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) and the feature ratio (cumulative) are less than the total number of plays of "175000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is displayed in a flashing manner.

<Second Embodiment> Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (or the main control board 50B if the main control board 50 is divided into 50A and 50B) is displayed at all times. , the light is on. When the light is turned on all the time, there are various ways to display the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38, but for example, the management information to be displayed may be updated every five seconds. Specifically, "U750" (displayed for 5 seconds) → "y645" (displayed for 5 seconds) → ... "A752" (displayed for 5 seconds) → "U750" (displayed for 5 seconds) → ... is displayed. This can be mentioned. Note that a digit turn-off time of approximately 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view showing the base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 41, illustration of the front door is omitted. Note that the front door opens/closes the front surface of the base body 1 using the "front door opening/closing shaft" (left side in the figure) as a support shaft in FIG. 41. Further, although FIG. 41 is used to explain the second embodiment, the structure of the first embodiment is also the same as that of FIG. 41. As shown in FIG. 41, inside the base portion 1, a power supply unit including a power switch 11, a medal payout device including a hopper 35, a symbol display device including three reels 31, etc. are housed. Further, the sub-control board 80 is attached to the left side surface of the inner surface of the base portion 1 . On the other hand, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 housed therein are attached to the inner back surface of the base portion 1 . Furthermore, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 are mounted above the symbol display device, so that when the front door is opened, the state of the caulked portion 16a of the board case 16 can be easily checked visually. In order to do this, it is attached at a relatively easy-to-see position within the base portion 1. Therefore, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can also be visually confirmed relatively easily.

In the specifications of the slot machine 10, in addition to a method in which medals are automatically replenished into the hopper 35a when the medals in the hopper 35 run out, a clerk at the hall opens the front door each time the medals in the hopper 35 run out. A method is known in which the hopper 35 is supplied with medals. However, when the front door is opened, the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, so the player can see the management information. . This makes it possible to know the advantageous section ratio, continuous role object ratio, etc. of the machine on which the player is currently playing. Therefore, there is a possibility that the set value can be estimated based on these values. Therefore, in the second embodiment, although the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, it is not easily visible to the player.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the board case 16 and the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) in the second embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 3 in the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, Example 1 in (a) shows an example in which the main control board 50 is composed of one piece, and Example 2 in (b) shows an example in which the main control board is composed of two pieces, 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this point is the same as FIG. 3 of the first embodiment). In FIG. 42(a), the management information display LED 74 is different from the first embodiment in that the management information display LED 74 is arranged as close to the left side as possible when viewed from the front of the main control board 50. In FIG. 41, the opening/closing axis of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, so if the management information display LED 74 is placed as far to the left as possible when viewed from the front, even if the front door is opened. , it becomes difficult for players to see.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 3(b), the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B is reversed from that in FIG. 3(b). The management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B, and is located on the left side within the board case 16.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the interval (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the caulking portion 16a is made longer. In FIG. 42, if the management information display LED 74 is positioned to the left, when the caulking portion 16a of the circuit board case 16 is moved away from the management information display LED 74, as shown in FIG. 42 (the same applies to FIG. 3), the caulking portion 16a is the right end of the board case 16. In this way, even if the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is accessed by destroying the caulking part 16a, the management information display LED 74 will not be damaged or damaged when the caulking part 16a is destroyed. It is possible to more effectively prevent this from occurring.

The caulking portion 16a is for breaking the board case 16 when unsealing it, but in addition to the caulking portion 16a, there is also a main body caulking portion (not shown) for fixing the gaming machine and the board case 16. You may be prepared. At this time, when removing the board case 16 from the gaming machine, it is necessary to also destroy the main body caulking part. In this case, similarly to the caulking portion 16a, the position where the body caulking portion is provided is set at the first position in order to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being accidentally damaged or damaged when the body caulking portion is destroyed. (for example, at the upper end of the board case 16), the management information display LED 74 is installed at a second position farther from the first position (for example, at the lower part, right side with respect to the center of the main control board 50). It is desirable to install it on the side (or left side).

As described above, by arranging the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the crimping portion 16a and/or the main body crimping portion are provided, damage to the management information display LED 74 can be effectively prevented. Note that, although the position of the crimping portion 16a is the right end, this is not limited to this, and it can also be designed as the upper end, for example. In this case, by arranging the management information display LED 74 in the lower part, right part, or left part based on the center of the main control board 50, it is possible to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being accidentally scratched or damaged when the crimping portion 16a is destroyed.

The above describes one embodiment of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows. (1) The upper limit of the number of plays in the advantageous zone is set to 1500 times, but it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set it using variables other than the total number of plays, such as the number of payouts of 3000 coins, the difference in number of coins of 2000 coins, or the number of plays during instruction function activation play (when small role group B is won) of 100 times. Alternatively, it is also possible to set multiple conditions, such as 1500 plays or 3000 coins, and determine that the upper limit has been reached when either one of them is met.

(2) Although the segment DP of the storage number display LED 76 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated indicator (such as an LED) may be provided to display whether or not it is an advantageous section. However, if existing LEDs can be used as in the above embodiment, the cost can be reduced. Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. Therefore, the lamp that displays the advantageous section needs to be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the production lamp 21 that is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 displays the advantageous section. It cannot be a lamp. However, even if the lamp is disguised as a type of presentation lamp, if it is controlled by the main control board 50, it can be used as a lamp to display an advantageous section.

Further, although the advantageous section display LED 77 is constructed from the segment DP of digit 2 of the storage number display LED 76, it may be constructed from the segment DP of digit 4 of the acquisition number display LED 78, for example.

Furthermore, when the player ends the game, he or she may operate the menu button 25 in order to display the game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, by arranging an advantageous period display LED near the menu button 25, it is possible to make the player aware that the player is in the advantageous period at the end of the game. For example, it is possible to place a storage number display LED 76 (digit 2 segment DP is the advantageous section display LED 77) or an acquired number display LED 78 (digit 4 segment DP is the advantageous section display LED 77) near the menu button 25. good. Of course, as shown in FIG. 2, it is also effective to provide an advantageous section display LED 77 near the settlement switch 46. Furthermore, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the menu button 25 becomes operable, so that the player can press the menu button 25 without noticing the transition to the advantageous section. (display of gaming history (two-dimensional code)) can be prevented.

(3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, when the power switch 11 is turned on again, the advantageous section control means 69 turns the power on/off. In order to maintain an advantageous section before and after, the advantageous section display LE
D77 lights up again. Therefore, for example, when the hall closes with the advantageous section display LED 77 lit, if you want to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77 at the start of business the next day, you need to change the settings (including resetting the same setting value). This can be mentioned. By changing the settings, the predetermined area of the RWM 53 is initialized, and the display data (advantageous section data) of the stored number display LED 76 is also initialized, so the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 is also set to "0". ”.

(4) During the advantageous zone, the instruction function is activated in a game in which a conditional device capable of activating the instruction function is selected. However, this is not limited to the above, and even in a game in which a conditional device capable of activating the instruction function is selected during the advantageous zone, the instruction function does not necessarily have to be activated. The advantageous zone is a game zone in which the instruction function is "enabled" to be activated. Therefore, after moving to the advantageous zone, whether or not to execute the instruction function activation game and the number of times to play the instruction function activation game may be determined by lottery or the like, and the instruction function activation game may be executed the determined number of times. Then, even if the number of times of play ends, if the conditions for continuing the advantageous zone are satisfied, it is possible to continue staying in the advantageous zone and determine the number of times to play the instruction function activation game again by lottery or the like. Furthermore, during the advantageous zone, the lottery for falling from the advantageous zone to the normal zone may be determined for each game or based on the winning of a specific conditional device (for example, a common setting such as a single win of small role D or small role E1).

(5) In the present embodiment, the value corresponding to the number of games played in an advantageous section is stored as a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played by 100. Similarly, the value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out when the continuous accessory is activated and the value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out when the accessory is activated are respectively stored as values obtained by multiplying the number of coins to be paid out by 100. However, this is not limited to this, and depending on the calculation method (CPU used) of the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio, it is also possible to memorize the number of games played and the number of coins paid out without multiplying by 100. Therefore, it is not necessarily limited to storing a value multiplied by 100. Similarly, the value of the total number of games is stored as the number of games played, but it is not limited to this, but depending on the calculation convenience, it may be the value obtained by adding a predetermined number to the total number of games played, or the value obtained by multiplying the total number of games by a predetermined value (total number of games played). (value corresponding to the number of times) may be stored. In this case, when calculating the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio, the data in the storage area where the number of games itself and the number of paid-out coins are stored is multiplied by 100, and the above-mentioned subtraction process is repeatedly executed. By executing the process (for example, FIG. 37), it becomes possible to calculate.

(6) The advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory action ratio, and accessory action ratio are calculated for each game or for each predetermined number of games, regardless of whether management information is displayed, and are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. You can leave it there. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory operation ratio, and accessory operation ratio are calculated when displaying management information (when a display request is made), and the calculation results are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. You may display the results.

(7) In the above embodiment, the management information is displayed in order each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. However, this is not limited to the setting switch 13, and other switches, such as the bet switch 40, may be used, or a separate switch dedicated to displaying management information may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately, but it is conceivable that the setting switch and the reset switch are configured as a single switch as the setting change/reset switch. In this case, it is possible to display management information by operating the setting change/reset switch, provided that the operation of the setting change/reset switch does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation. The same applies when the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately as in this embodiment, and management information is displayed by operating the reset switch 14.

Specifically, when an error is detected, the mode does not shift to the management information display mode, and the mode shifts to the management information display mode on the condition that no error occurs. For example, if a medal retention error in the medal selector occurs among recoverable errors, the mode will not shift to the management information display mode unless the error is removed.

Further, in the embodiment described above, management information is displayed each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. That is, even if the operator releases the operation switch 13 after turning on the setting switch 13, the management information remains displayed. On the other hand, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is pressed, and the display of the management information may be ended when the operator releases the setting switch 13. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is pressed for the first time, "U750", which is the first management information, is displayed, but when the setting switch 13 is released, the display ends (digits 6 to 6). 9). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, "y645", which is the second management information, is displayed, but when the setting switch 13 is released, the display can be controlled to end. Even when a switch other than the setting switch 13 is used as the switch for displaying management information, the same control as described above is possible.

In this way, there are various variations in which switch is used to display the management information, and the relationship between the operation of the switch that displays the management information and the display pattern (time for which the information is displayed), and these are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, the display pattern of the management information can be: a) a display pattern in which the management information is always displayed b) a pattern in which the management information is displayed when the front door is opened (when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) a pattern in which the management information is displayed when the front door is opened and a specific switch is operated d) a pattern in which the management information is displayed when the front door is opened, the setting key is inserted to turn on the setting key switch 12, and a specific switch is operated. However, when an operation to switch to the setting change mode is performed and the setting change mode is switched to, the management information display mode is not switched to and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, digit 5 is lit, but digits 6 to 9 are turned off.

(8) In this embodiment, the total number of games is counted until the count value of the total number of games becomes 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF(H)"). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the cumulative total reaches a predetermined value, counting may be terminated even if the upper limit of the storage capacity has not been reached. Furthermore, when the total number of games has reached a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games may be cleared and counting of the total number of games may be started again. The above also applies to the total number of coins to be paid out.

(9) The slot machine 10 of this embodiment is designed so that the advantageous section ratio is 70 (%) or less. Therefore, it is not assumed that the favorable section ratio in the market will exceed 70 (%). However, it cannot be denied that the advantageous section ratio may exceed "70" (%) when, for example, a cheating act is performed. Therefore, for example, we monitor the data value of "F008" that stores the advantageous section ratio, and if the value exceeds "70 (D)", we output some kind of warning or display the advantageous section ratio. An example of this is to make it different from normal times (display that there is an abnormality). For example, in the display of the information type "U7" of the advantageous section ratio, a method may be used in which the upper digit "U" and the lower digit "7" are alternately flashed at high speed.

Similarly, if the upper limit of the design value for the continuous character ratio or character ratio is set to 60 (%), for example, if the continuous character ratio or character ratio exceeds the upper limit of the design value, some Examples include methods of outputting a warning and displaying the information type in the same manner as above. Alternatively, the external signal transmitting means 70 may be used to transmit information such as the advantageous section ratio to the hall computer 200, and for example, when the advantageous section ratio exceeds "70" (%), information regarding a warning may be transmitted. Can be mentioned.

(10) As mentioned above, if the advantageous section ratio is set to be "70" (%) or less for all game sections, the other sections can be set relatively freely. Furthermore, the winning ratio from the normal section to the advantageous section may be set to less than "1/32". Furthermore, as mentioned above, during an advantageous section, if you win a condition device that can activate the instruction function, you may always activate the instruction function, but if you only move to an advantageous section, the instruction function will not be activated, and the instruction function will not be activated. The instruction function may be activated when the user wins a lottery to determine whether or not to activate the function. Alternatively, when moving to an advantageous section, you can choose whether to make it an advantageous section where the instruction function is always activated, or whether to make it an advantageous section where the instruction function is activated only when you win a lottery to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function. , may be determined by lottery or the like.

Furthermore, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (the end of the advantageous section) may be made when a predetermined number of games has been completed at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or the number of games may not be determined. , a lottery may be held to shift from the advantageous section to the normal section every game or when predetermined conditions are met, and when the lottery is won, the shift from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, control is unconditionally performed to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section.

(11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but it may be composed of, for example, two digits. For example, as shown in the example of FIG. 39 or FIG. ``U7'' and ``50'' may be displayed alternately and repeatedly each time lapses.

(12) The advantageous section ratio, continuous character object ratio, and character object ratio are calculated by rounding down the decimal places, so accurate values are not necessarily displayed. In that sense, the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio are values corresponding to (equivalent to) the advantageous section ratio, values corresponding to (equivalent to) the continuous accessory ratio, and values corresponding to (equivalent to) the accessory ratio, respectively. ) is also called the value. In addition, the advantageous section ratio, continuous character ratio, and character ratio are not limited to numbers rounded down to the nearest whole number, numbers rounded to the nearest whole number, numbers rounded up to the nearest whole number, and the last digit is "5" or "5". It may also be a numerical value converted into 10'' increments.

(13) In this embodiment, the combination of symbols that stop on the active line is the same when winning the small winning combination E1 and when winning the small winning combination E2. For example, when winning a small winning combination E1 or E2, when the first stop on the left or middle is made, a stop roll of the middle cherry (minor win 36) is possible, and when the first stop on the right is made, the stop roll is such that the middle cherry does not appear. (Winner of 38 small roles). Therefore, it was not possible to determine which of the small winning combinations E1 and E2 was won, regardless of whether or not the middle cherry appeared. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the middle cherry is not to appear, the stop number may be changed instead. For example, when winning a small winning combination E1 or E2, if it is the first stop on the left or middle, a middle cherry appears, and when a middle cherry appears, the player determines whether the small winning combination E1 or E2 has been won. make it impossible.

On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, when the first stop is on the right, control is performed to prevent the middle cherry from appearing in the same way as above, and instead of making the middle cherry appear, the small winning combination E1 or E2 is An example of this is to make a stopping number appear so that the player can determine which one has won.

Specifically, for example, control may be performed as follows.
First, the small winning combinations included in the winning of the small winning combination E1 are assumed to be the small winning combinations 36 and 38, as in the above embodiment. On the other hand, the small winning combinations included in the winning of the small winning combination E2 are the small winning combinations 36 and 41 (the small winning combination 41 is newly added). When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the small winning combination 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped, and the small winning combination 38 is stopped when the small winning combination E1 is won and the small winning combination 38 is stopped first on the right. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E2 is won and the right first stop occurs, the small winning combination 41 is stopped.

The combination of symbols for small win 41 may be, for example, "Bell A/Bell B" - "Replay" - "Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank." This causes the symbols on the middle reel 31 to be different when small win 38 and small win 41 stop. When small win 38 stops, "Replay" does not stop on the middle reel 31, but when small win 41 stops, "Replay" always stops on the middle reel 31. This makes it possible to determine whether small win 38 (small win E1) or small win 41 (small win E2) has been won.

Furthermore, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small winning combination 38 is made to stop when the middle tier cherry does not stop when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the small winning combination 41 stops when the middle tier cherry does not stop when the small winning combination E2 is won. It's okay. In this way, even when the left or middle first stop occurs, when the middle cherry is not stopped, it can be determined whether the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 has been won.

Other methods include, for example, the following. The small winning combinations included in the winning of the small winning combination E1 are the small winning combinations 36 and 38, as in the above embodiment. Moreover, the small winnings included in the winning of the small winning combination E2 are also the small winnings 36, 37, and 38, as in the above embodiment. When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the small winning combination 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped, and when the small winning combination E1 is winning and the right stopping first, the small winning combination 38 can be stopped depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 42. When the small winning combination E2 is won and the right first stop is made, the small winning combination 38 is stopped according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42. When the small winning combination 38 is missed when winning the small winning combination E1 or E2, the combinations of different symbols are stopped. Thereby, it may be possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or E2 has been won.

(14) If you win 1BBA + small role E1 and turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 before the predetermined timing of the next game arrives, the effect (continuous effect, etc.) indicating whether or not to move to the advantageous section will not be output. It is preferable. This is because, since the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the player knows that the game is moving to the advantageous section. However, it is possible to output a continuous performance of whether or not the player has won 1BBA (special role). In addition, when winning 1BBA + small winning combination E1 and deciding to move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on even after a predetermined timing has elapsed (always in the figure). At timing 2) shown in 23, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the small winning combination E1 has won, so that the small winning combination E1 is won alone and the player enters the advantageous section. Since it is known that it has been decided to transfer, in such a case, there is no need to output an effect that incites whether or not you have won 1BB.

(15) In this embodiment, if the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small winning group B, it is possible to win a 1-card winning combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of small winning combinations that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small winning group B may be any number of winning combinations. Further, in this embodiment, the failure rate when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small winning combination B group is set to 75%, but it is not limited to this, and can be set to various values such as 50%. Further, even when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small winning combination C group, it is possible to set the winning combination so that the winning combination is missed at a certain probability, similar to when the small winning combination B group is winning.

(16) In the above embodiment, during 1BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) for setting 6 is set to be greater than setting 1, and for example, when the number of games during 1BBA operation reaches a predetermined number of times, an advantageous Addition of sections has been added. However, contrary to the above, during 1BBA operation, setting 6 increases the winning probability of small winning combination A of setting 6 and lowering the winning probability of small winning combination E2, so that setting 6 results in fewer games. It may be set to the number of times (expected value). In this case, for example, when the 1BBA operation is completed with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), an advantageous section may be added.

(17) In this embodiment, when it is decided to move to an advantageous section when a conditional device that does not include a special winning combination that can carry over winnings, such as a small winning combination E1, is won alone, the It was decided to light up the section display LED 77. Here, the "predetermined timing" is not limited to the timing shown in the above embodiment, and can be set in various ways. For example, when winning determination is completed in a game when the minor winning combination E1 is won, when medals are paid out in the game, when medals are paid out, etc.

In addition, although this does not occur in this embodiment, for example, if it is decided to move to an advantageous section in a game where the replay won, the automatic bet will start when the automatic bet ends based on the winning replay or the next game (replay). For example, when the switch 41 is operated, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

(18) When "1BBA + small win E1" is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left or middle stop, small win 36 can be won, and a middle cherry can appear. However, when only small win E1 is the winning flag, the middle cherry can appear, and when the 1BBA winning flag is also set, the stop control can be performed so that the middle cherry does not appear regardless of the pressing order (all small wins 38 are won). When controlled in this way, there is a disadvantage in that even if it is decided to move to the advantageous zone when "1BBA + small win E1" is won, the middle cherry cannot be displayed to entice the player.

On the other hand, even when the small winning combination E1 is won alone after it becomes inside the 1BBA, the standing winning flag becomes "1BBA + small winning combination E1", so the same stop control as above can be adopted. As mentioned above, it is not possible to decide whether to move to the advantageous section in the inside, so even if the player learns that he is in the inside and wins the small winning combination E1 and a middle-tier cherry appears, the player cannot , I get the impression that I wasted my time. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned stop control is performed, no middle-tier cherries will appear inside, so the player will not have the impression that the draw was wasted.

In particular, one of the symbol combinations for small win 38 is "Bell A/Bell B" - "Cherry" - "Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank" (Figure 11), and this symbol combination is similar to pattern symbol 02, "Bell A/Bell B" - "Cherry" - "Bell A/Bell B". Therefore, by making the above symbol combination for small win 38 appear, it is possible to make it look like a missed opportunity when winning small win group B (without making it look like a rare win). The above also applies when "1BBA + small win E2" is won, when 1BBB is inside and then small win E1 is won alone, or when 1BBB is inside and then small win E2 is won alone.

(19) As shown in FIG. 17, the replay winning probability is the same for non-RTs and RT1s (the number is "8978"). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of the RT1 replay may be set higher than the winning probability of the non-RT replay.

(20) In the present embodiment, after the 1BBB operation ends, the process moves to RT1, a lottery for Replay E is performed in RT1, and an advantageous section is added by winning Replay E. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when transitioning to RT1 during an advantageous section, it is possible to set the advantageous section to a zone specializing in top-ups (a state where the frequency of top-up is high, a state where the number of top-up games is large). Then, the pattern symbol is displayed and the special zone is continued until it moves to RT2, and every time a predetermined condition is met in RT1 (not limited to winning Replay E), the advantageous section is added. Good too.

(21) In this embodiment, the RT after the end of 1BBA operation is defined as non-RT, and the RT after the end of 1BBB operation is defined as RT1. However, instead of shifting to different RTs like this, it is also possible to shift to the same RT. For example, it may be possible to shift to non-RT after the 1BBB operation ends. In this case, after the 1BBB operation in the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section may be set as an additional specialization zone.

(22) In this embodiment, the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative), consecutive feature ratio (6000 games and cumulative), and feature ratio (6000 games and cumulative) are displayed as management information, but it is also possible to calculate and display other management information, such as the payout rate. Examples of methods for calculating the payout rate include the following: a) "Total number of payouts x 100" ÷ "Total number of games excluding replays after winning a replay" b) "(Total number of payouts + number of replays x 3) x 100" ÷ "Total number of games" When a) is adopted, buffers are provided to store "Total number of payouts x 100" and "Total number of games excluding replays after winning a replay". When b) is adopted, a buffer is provided to store "(Total number of payouts + number of replays x 3) x 100". Alternatively, you can set up separate buffers for "total payout number x 100" and "number of replay wins x 300" and add the two values together.

Note that "3" in "Number of Replay Winnings x 3" means the number of bets for the game when the replay wins. For example, if the number of bets changes depending on the game status, etc., it is not limited to "3", but may be the value bet on the game when the replay wins (for example, "2" or "1"). There may be games to play. In addition, it is equipped with a storage area that stores the total number of games played, the total number of coins paid out, and the number of replay wins (which may also be "number of replay wins x value bet on the game when the replay won"), and the payout rate. When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 before calculation.

Furthermore, as for the calculation method of a) and b), a method of repeating subtraction is adopted, similar to the calculation method described above. Then, by displaying the payout rate as one of the management information and comparing it with the designed payout rate, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is fraudulent. Furthermore, in this case as well, if the lighting mode is changed depending on whether the total number of games played is 6,000 or more or 175,000 or more, it is possible to more accurately identify a fraudulent gaming machine. It becomes possible to judge whether Note that the information type indicating the payout rate may be displayed in any manner as long as it can be distinguished from other management information, but for example, digit 6 may be displayed as "P.", and digits 7 to 9 An example of this is to display the payout rate (3-digit number) using .

(23) In this embodiment, it has been explained that the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter, and may also be an increment counter. Here, if an increment counter is adopted as the upper limit counter 69b, it has the following advantages. When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b reaches the upper limit, for example, when the count value reaches "1500" in the case of an increment counter, various parameters related to the advantageous section (stored in the RWM 53) are initialized value). The parameters to be initialized include, for example, the advantageous section counter 69a, the upper limit counter 69b, the number of times the instruction function is activated (when the instruction function is activated when winning the small role B group), and the like. Then, "0" is optimal as the value at the time of initialization. Furthermore, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 storing parameters to be initialized are consecutive. Specifically, for example, "F100", "F101", "F102", etc.

This is similar to the initialization process of the RWM53 due to a setting change, and can be initialized simply by repeating the process of entering "0" into the addresses of the RWM53 within a predetermined range while shifting the addresses one by one. This is because it can be executed using standardized processing. Note that the parameters that are cleared when the upper limit is set in the advantageous section are also initialized when the settings are changed. In addition, the addresses of the RWM 53 that store the parameters to be initialized are assigned with regularity (for example, "F100", "F102", "F104", etc.), and "0" is assigned to the address. Even when initialization is performed by repeatedly performing the process of entering the address by shifting the address by a predetermined value (in the above case, "2"), it can be executed with a simplified process.

Here, if the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter, and its count value is "0", it is not possible to tell from the count value whether it has been initialized to "0" or whether the advantageous zone has reached its upper limit (1500 plays) and is therefore set to "0". Therefore, when judging whether or not it is the upper limit of the advantageous zone based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, it is necessary to do so based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and data indicating whether or not it is in an advantageous zone (stored in a specified area of the RWM 53). In contrast, when the upper limit counter 69b is an increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b can be read, and if it is "1500", it can be judged to be the upper limit of the advantageous zone. In other words, it is possible to judge whether or not it is the upper limit based solely on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) The data update of RWM53 shown in Figures 27 to 30, and the processing of Figures 32, 36, and 37 are executed at the end of each game, more specifically, after the winning determination process. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since management information such as the advantageous zone ratio is constantly displayed, it is possible that the same management information (e.g., advantageous zone ratio) is displayed multiple times during one game. It is also possible that the advantageous zone ratio, etc. is calculated each time it is displayed. From the above, it is possible that the same management information (e.g., advantageous zone ratio) is calculated multiple times during one game. (25) The above embodiments and various modified examples are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Additional notes> The inventions described in the original specification etc. of the present application (original inventions) can include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 21, and the problems to be solved by each original invention and the problems related to the original invention, respectively. The means for solving the problem and the effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the inventions described in this specification are not limited to the original inventions 1 to 21.

1. Original Invention 1 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a slot machine that has an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. It is. Some conventional gaming machines are known that store the cumulative value of the number of payouts and display the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts in a graph based on the player's operations (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-125121 reference). In conventional gaming machines, it is possible to check the cumulative number of payouts, but in slot machines that execute AT, for example, it is not possible to know the proportion of AT in the overall game. Furthermore, simply by displaying the cumulative total of the number of payouts, it was not possible to determine whether the total number of payouts was within the range of the design value. The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to enable easy and accurate confirmation of the percentage of stay in the advantageous sections in a slot machine equipped with advantageous sections.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 1 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). In a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B group) and a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (instruction of the order of pressing on the winning number display LED 78). a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed; and an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed in the game section; When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section is entered, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section is terminated. RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) and a second storage means (RWM53: "F007" in FIG. F004" to "F001"), and means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37) and means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay percentage in the advantageous section when the conditions for displaying the stay percentage in the advantageous section are met. .

(c) Effect of original invention 1 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section. Furthermore, it can be easily determined whether the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the designed value.

2. Original invention 2 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 2 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 2 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). In a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B group) and a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (instruction of the order of pressing on the winning number display LED 78). a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed; and an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed in the game section; When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section is entered, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section is terminated. RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) and a second storage means (RWM53: "F007" in FIG. F004" to "F001"); means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37); , means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay percentage in the advantageous section when the conditions for displaying the stay percentage in the advantageous section are met; When the stored value has not reached the predetermined value ("175000" game), the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the LED blinks), and the first memory When the value stored in the means has reached a predetermined value, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is displayed in a display mode different from the specific display mode (for example, in a mode in which an LED is turned on). shall be.

(c) Effect of the original invention 2 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of plays and a value corresponding to the number of plays in an advantageous zone are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay proportion in an advantageous zone can be calculated and displayed, so that the value corresponding to the stay proportion in an advantageous zone can be easily and accurately confirmed. Furthermore, it is also easy to determine whether or not the value corresponding to the stay proportion in an advantageous zone is within the range of design values. It is also easy to determine the number of plays that the value corresponding to the stay proportion in an advantageous zone corresponds to.

3. Original invention 3 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 3 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 3 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B) and a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (the number of acquisitions display LED 78 is displayed). an instruction function activation game (displaying push order instruction information); a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed; and an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function activation game can be executed. , When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are met in the normal section, the mode shifts to the advantageous section, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section is ended. A storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27), and a second storage means (RWM53: FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played by 100). Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio in an advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; 37), and means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the percentage of stay in the advantageous section, and when a predetermined switch (for example, setting switch 13) is turned on. Based on the fact that the predetermined switch is turned off, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is not displayed.

The second solution is for a game that has an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when a small winning group B group is won), and a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. , an instruction function activation game in which an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (press order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), and a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed in the game section. , Among the game sections, there is an advantageous section in which the instruction function activation game can be executed, and when the conditions for transition to the advantageous section are satisfied in the normal section, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied. ends the advantageous section, and the first storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games played, and the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (games A second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value obtained by multiplying the number of times by 100), and an advantageous value based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means. Means for calculating the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37); Means for displaying the value corresponding to the stay ratio for the advantageous section (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)). Displaying a value corresponding to the percentage of stay in the advantageous section based on the operation of a predetermined switch (for example, the setting switch 13), and displaying the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section based on the operation of the predetermined switch again. It is characterized by ending the display of the value corresponding to the ratio.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 3 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of plays and a value corresponding to the number of plays in an advantageous zone are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay percentage in an advantageous zone can be calculated and displayed, so that the value corresponding to the stay percentage in an advantageous zone can be easily and accurately confirmed. Furthermore, it can be easily determined whether or not the value corresponding to the stay percentage in an advantageous zone is within the range of design values. Also, the display/non-display of the value corresponding to the stay percentage in an advantageous zone can be switched by simply operating a specified switch.

4. Original Invention 4 (a) The problem that Original Invention 4 aims to solve is the same as Original Invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problems of Original Invention 4 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention comprises: a game having an advantageous operation mode (correct push order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small win group B is won); an instruction function activation game in which an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (indicating push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78); a normal section within the game section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed; and an advantageous section within the game section in which the instruction function activation game can be executed, wherein when a transition condition for the advantageous zone is satisfied in the normal section, a transition is made to the advantageous zone, and when a termination condition for the advantageous zone is satisfied, the advantageous zone is terminated; and a first storage means (RWM 53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value obtained by adding "a value equivalent to a decimal number "for each game" as a value corresponding to the total number of games played (RWM 53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27); The device is characterized by comprising: a second storage means (RWM 53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value obtained by adding "a value equivalent to a decimal number "100" for each play in the advantageous zone as a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone; a means (advantageous zone control means 69; FIG. 37) for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous zone based on the value stored in the first storage means and the value stored in the second storage means; and a means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous zone.

(c) Effect of original invention 4 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section. Furthermore, it can be easily determined whether the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the designed value. Further, when calculating the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section, an integer value can be calculated.

5. Original Invention 5 (a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 5: Same as that of Original Invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problems of Original Invention 5 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention comprises: a game having an advantageous operation mode (correct push order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small win group B is won); an instruction function activation game in which an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (indicating push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78); a normal section within the game section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed; and an advantageous section within the game section in which the instruction function activation game can be executed, wherein when a transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, a transition is made to the advantageous section, and when a termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated; a first storage means (RWM 53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) having a storage area of 3 bytes and capable of storing a value obtained by adding "a value equivalent to a decimal number "1" for each game as a value corresponding to the total number of games played; The invention is characterized by comprising: a second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) having a 4-byte storage area and capable of storing a value obtained by adding "a value equivalent to '100' in decimal" for each play in the favorable zone as a value corresponding to the number of plays in the favorable zone; a third storage means (RWM53: "F008" in FIG. 27) having a 1-byte storage area and capable of storing a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the favorable zone calculated based on the value stored in the first storage means and the value stored in the second storage means; and a means (management information display LED74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the favorable zone. (c) Effects of the original invention 5 Same as the original invention 4.

6. Original invention 6 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 6 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 6 (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses) In a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B group) and a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (instruction of the order of pressing on the winning number display LED 78). A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section; An advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed in the game section; Storage means (RWM53) ), and initialization means (power switch 11, reset switch 14) that initializes at least a part of the storage means based on satisfying a predetermined condition, and a transition condition from the normal section to the advantageous section. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section is entered, and as the storage means, a ``value equivalent to ``1'' in decimal notation is added for each game. A first storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) that can store the value corresponding to the total number of games played, and "100 in decimal number" for each game in the advantageous section. a second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value obtained by adding a value corresponding to "a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section as a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section; Means for calculating a value corresponding to a stay ratio in an advantageous section based on the value stored in the means and the value stored in the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37); and a means for displaying a value corresponding to the ratio (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)), and the initializing means does not initialize the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, making it possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the percentage of stay in advantageous sections. Furthermore, it can be easily determined whether the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the designed value. Further, even if the initialization operation is performed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section can be displayed based on the data accumulated up to that point.

7. Original invention 7 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 7 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 7 (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses) In a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B group) and a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (instruction of the order of pressing on the winning number display LED 78). a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed; and an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed in the game section; When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section is entered, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section is terminated. RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27), a second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37); means for displaying the value to be displayed (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)); If the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means is not exceeded even after adding , "a value equivalent to "1" in decimal notation" is added to the value stored in the first storage means, and When the value stored in the storage means is the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means, control is performed so that the value stored in the first storage means becomes the upper limit even as the game progresses; When the value stored in the first storage means is the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means, the value stored in the second storage means is maintained even as the game progresses during the advantageous section. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of original invention 7 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section. Furthermore, it can be easily determined whether the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the designed value. Further, when the value stored in the first storage means reaches the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means, updating of the values of the first storage means and the second storage means is terminated, so that both It is possible to eliminate discrepancies between data.

8. Original Invention 8 (a) Problems to be solved by Original Invention 8: Same as Original Invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problems of Original Invention 8 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). The original invention comprises: a game having an advantageous operation mode (correct push order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won); an instruction function activation game in which an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (indicating push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78); a normal zone within the game zone in which the instruction function activation game is not executed; and an advantageous zone within the game zone in which the instruction function activation game can be executed; when a condition for transitioning to the advantageous zone is satisfied in the normal zone, a transition is made to the advantageous zone, and when a condition for terminating the advantageous zone is satisfied, the advantageous zone is terminated; The main control board (main control board 50) includes a first storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing values corresponding to the total number of times played, a second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing values corresponding to the number of times played in the advantageous zone, and a means (advantageous zone control means 69; FIG. 37) for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous zone based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means, and the main control board includes a plurality of visible display units (digits 6 to 9), and when displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous zone, some of the display units (digits 6 and 7) display content (information type) meaning the stay ratio in the advantageous zone, and the other display units (digits 8 and 9) display a value (numerical value) corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous zone.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of plays and a value corresponding to the number of plays in an advantageous zone are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay proportion in an advantageous zone can be calculated and displayed, so that the value corresponding to the stay proportion in an advantageous zone can be easily and accurately confirmed. Furthermore, it can be easily determined whether or not the value corresponding to the stay proportion in an advantageous zone is within the range of design values. Furthermore, even if a value other than the stay proportion in an advantageous zone is displayed on the display unit, for example, the value corresponding to the stay proportion in an advantageous zone can be identified without being confused with other information.

9. Initial Invention 9 (a) Problem to be solved by Initial Invention 9 Same as Initial Invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 9 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses) In a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B group) and a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (instruction of the order of pressing on the winning number display LED 78). a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed; and an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed in the game section; When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section is entered, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section is terminated. RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27), a second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section, and A main control board (main control board 50) including means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37) for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio in an advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means. The main control board is equipped with a plurality of visually visible display parts (digits 6 to 9), and when the value corresponding to the percentage of stay in the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (70%), a specific display is displayed. A value corresponding to the stay percentage in the advantageous section is displayed on the display section in a mode (for example, a blinking display), and when the value corresponding to the stay percentage in the advantageous section does not exceed the specific value, a display different from the specific display mode is displayed. The present invention is characterized in that a value corresponding to a stay ratio in an advantageous section is displayed on the display section in a manner (for example, a lighting display).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section. Furthermore, whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the design value can be easily determined based on the display mode.

10. Original invention 10 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 10 Conventionally, an instruction function activation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won) It is known to perform (AT). Here, it is known that control (management) of the AT is executed not only by a sub-control board but also by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). However, notification of AT's winning is carried out exclusively by the sub-control board, and even if the main control board determines AT's winning, the main control board does not notify AT's winning. Furthermore, even if a peripheral device electrically connected to the main control board is used to notify the winning of AT, the winning of AT will be notified after a predetermined game after the game in which the AT won. There is a problem in that there is a possibility that the player may stop playing the game before the AT announces the winning. Therefore, the problem that the invention originally sought to solve was to display the transition to an advantageous section using peripheral equipment electrically connected to the main control board when the player moves to an advantageous section, and to The purpose is to make the display easier to notice.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 10 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). In a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B group) and a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (instruction of the order of pressing on the winning number display LED 78). (displaying information) instruction function activation game; a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed; an advantageous section of the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed; and storage of game media. It is equipped with a stored number display means (stored number display LED 76) that displays the number, and a payment switch (46) that is operated when paying out the stored game media, and when the conditions for transition to the advantageous section are met, it is advantageous. The storage number display means has a plurality of segments (segments A to G, and DP) that can be lit, and the storage number display means has a plurality of segments (segments A to G and DP) that can be lit. The number of storage is displayed by lighting up the segments (segments A to G), and it is indicated that the area is advantageous by lighting up some other segments (segment DP). When it is decided to move to the advantageous area, The present invention is characterized in that, by the time the operation of the settlement switch becomes effective, it is possible to display that it is an advantageous section by lighting up some of the other segments.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 10 According to the original invention, it is possible to display that it is an advantageous section by using some segments of the storage number display means. In addition, since it is displayed that the player is in an advantageous period before the operation of the settlement switch becomes effective, the player is prevented from quitting the game (by operating the settlement switch) even though it is in an advantageous section from the next game. Can be suppressed.

11. Original Invention 11 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 11 Conventionally, an instruction function activation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won) It is known to perform (AT). Here, it is known that control (management) of the AT is executed not only by a sub-control board but also by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). Furthermore, when an AT is won, the number of precursory games is drawn, for example, and after the number of precursory games is exhausted, the winning of the AT is announced. On the other hand, in recent years, consideration has been given to using the election of a special role as an opportunity to shift to an advantageous section. Here, when to display the transition to the advantageous section when you move to the advantageous section when you win a special role, and when you move to the advantageous section when you move to the advantageous section when you win a role other than the special role. The question is whether it should be executed. Therefore, the problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to display the transition to the advantageous section at an appropriate timing when it is decided to move to the advantageous section in response to winning a winning combination.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 11 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). In a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B group) and a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (instruction of the order of pressing on the winning number display LED 78). (displaying information) instruction function activated game; a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function activated game is not executed; an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function activated game can be executed; and an advantageous section. an advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying this, and means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6); and a lottery means for executing a lottery so that there is a possibility of a first win (winning of 1BBA) or a second win (winning of small role E1 alone), and the probability of winning the first win is the same for all setting values. The probability of winning the second win is the same for all setting values, and in the case of the first win, the predetermined symbol combination (1BBA symbol combination) corresponding to the first win does not stop. If the winning is carried over to the next game when the combination of the predetermined symbols mentioned above is won, the second winning is not carried over to the next game, and if the conditions for transition to the advantageous section are met, the winning is advantageous. If the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section will end, and if the winner becomes the first or second winner in the regular section, it will be decided to move to the advantageous section. If you win the second prize in the normal section and decide to move to the advantageous section, the above-mentioned When the advantageous section display means displays the first prize in the normal section and it is decided to move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display means does not perform the display by the predetermined timing (for example, 1BBA). (during display).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, when a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to a first win does not stop in a game resulting in a first win and the first win is carried over to the next game, the next game can be played without displaying the advantageous zone display means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advantageous zone display means from displaying the advantageous zone before the player is aware that a first win has occurred. In other words, it is possible to prevent only the displaying by the advantageous zone display means from being performed when a role does not win in a game resulting in a first win.

12. Original invention 12 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 12 Same as original invention 11. (b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 12 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B) and a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (the number of acquisitions display LED 78 is displayed). (displaying push order instruction information) an instruction function activation game; a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed; an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function activation game can be executed; Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying the section, and means for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13). ), and a lottery means for executing a lottery so that there is a possibility of a first win (multiple winning of 1BBA + minor role E1) or a second win (single win of minor role E1), is the same for all set values, the probability of winning the second win is the same for all set values, and the first win is a special win (1BBA) that carries over the winning to the next game until the combination of symbols stops. , and a winning that includes a prescribed role (minor role E1) that does not carry over to the next game, and the second winning is a winning that includes a prescribed role but does not include a special role, and the conditions for transition to an advantageous section are When the conditions are met, the winner will move to the advantageous section; when the end conditions of the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section will end; and in the normal section, if the winner is the first winner or the second winner, the winner will be transferred to the advantageous section. If you become the first winner in the normal section and decide to shift to the advantageous section, you can make a bet for the next game and the settlement switch 46 can be operated until a predetermined timing. ), and there are cases where the display is performed by the advantageous section display means by the predetermined timing, and there is a case where the display is not performed by the advantageous section display means by the predetermined timing, and the second prize is won in the normal section and shifts to the advantageous section. When it is determined that the advantageous section displaying means has decided to do so, the advantageous section displaying means displays the information by the predetermined timing. The second solution is that in the first winning game, priority is given to stopping the combination of symbols of a predetermined winning combination rather than stopping the combination of symbols of a special winning combination. It is characterized by (c) Effect of original invention 12 According to the original invention, when it is decided to win the first prize and move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display means may or may not display the information by a predetermined timing. Therefore, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination stops and the display by the advantageous section display means is performed, it is possible to make the player expect to continue winning the special winning combination. Become.

13. Original Invention 13 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 13 Conventionally, an instruction function activation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won) It is known to perform (AT). Here, it is known that control (management) of the AT is executed not only by a sub-control board but also by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). Furthermore, when an AT is won, for example, the number of precursory games is drawn by lottery, and after the number of precursory games is exhausted, the winning of the AT is announced. On the other hand, recently, for example, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section after winning a combination that does not carry over to the next game, it has been considered to display the transition to the advantageous section before the start of the next game. ing. However, if the display is performed early in this manner, there is a problem in that it is difficult to perform promotions and the like to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section. Therefore, the problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to make it possible to output promotional effects and the like regarding the advantageous section afterward, even when the transition to the advantageous section is displayed at an early stage.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 13 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B) and a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (the number of acquisitions display LED 78 is displayed). (displaying push order instruction information) an instruction function activation game; a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed; an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function activation game can be executed; Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying the section, and means for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13). ), and a lottery means that executes a lottery so that there is a possibility of a specific win (for example, a single win of the small role E1), the probability of winning the specific win is the same for all setting values, and the probability of winning the specific win is the same for all setting values, It is possible to decide to move to an advantageous section when the transition conditions are met, to end the advantageous section when the end conditions of the advantageous section are met, and to move to the advantageous section when a specific winner is won in the normal section. Yes, when a specific win is achieved in the normal section and it is decided to move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display means is displayed until a predetermined timing (before bets can be placed on the next game and the settlement switch 46 can be operated). In the advantageous section, the instruction function activation game (a game that displays the correct pressing order when winning the small role B group) is executed at least once, and in the advantageous section, the instruction function activation game is executed at least once. It is characterized by having a first end condition (for example, the number of executions of the instruction function activation game is 1) and a second end condition (for example, the number of games played from the start of the advantageous section is 100 games) that have different expected values. .

The second solution means, in the first solution means, sets a third ending condition (games from the start of the advantageous section) that has priority over the first ending condition and the second ending condition as the ending condition of the advantageous section. 1500 games), and when the third ending condition is satisfied, the advantageous section ends even before the first ending condition or the second ending condition is satisfied. A third solving means is characterized in that, in the first or second solving means, when the advantageous section display means displays, it is possible to output a continuous performance over a plurality of games.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, even if the advantageous area display means performs the display at an early stage when it is decided to move to the advantageous area, at least more than one condition exists as the end condition of the advantageous area. , and since there are cases where the game ends after one instruction function activation game, even after the display by the advantageous section display means, it is necessary to use productions that stimulate the player (for example, to continue to create a sense of expectation in the player). It becomes possible to output a performance for

14. Original Invention 14 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 14 Conventionally, an instruction function activation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won) It is known to perform (AT). Here, it is known that control (management) of the AT is executed not only by a sub-control board but also by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). However, in the conventional technology, it was common to draw an AT lottery even in a game where the winning position was won after winning a special prize, but a game in which the AT lottery was held was held until the winning position was won. As the number of players has increased, it has recently become desirable not to hold an AT lottery in games that have been closed. In addition, the middle cherry (rare small role) is known as a stop result with a high probability of winning at AT. Here, there is a problem in that when a middle cherry appears after the special prize has been won (after the player knows that the special prize has been won), it gives the player the impression that the draw was wasted. . Therefore, the problem that the invention was originally intended to solve is to not stop the combination of symbols that can be expected to move to the advantageous section if it is not decided to move to the advantageous section after the special winning is in the middle. .

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 14 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). The first solution means is: a game having an advantageous operation mode (correct push order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role group B is won); a command function activation game in which an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (the command function activation game is displayed on the winning number display LED 78); a normal section within the game section in which the command function activation game is not executed; an advantageous section within the game section in which the command function activation game can be executed; an advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that the section is an advantageous section; a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6); a lottery means (role selection means 61) for executing a lottery so that there are cases in which a specific win (single win of the small role E1) or a special win (win of 1BB) will result; and a reel control means (65) for controlling the stopping of the reels when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means, wherein the probability of a specific win is the same for all set values, wherein a special win includes a win of a special role that carries over the win to the next game until the combination of symbols stops, wherein a transition to the advantageous zone occurs when a transition condition to the advantageous zone is satisfied, and wherein the advantageous zone ends when a termination condition of the advantageous zone is satisfied, wherein when a specific win occurs in the normal zone, it is possible to determine a transition to the advantageous zone, wherein even when a specific win occurs in the normal zone, if the special role win is carried over, it is not possible to determine a transition to the advantageous zone, wherein the reel control means: controls so that a symbol combination A (a symbol combination in which a cherry is displayed in the middle row) can be stopped when a specific win occurs during a game in a normal zone in which a special role win is not carried over, and controls so that a symbol combination B (a symbol combination in which a cherry is not displayed in the middle row) is stopped preferentially over a symbol combination A when a specific win occurs during a game in a normal zone in which a special role win is carried over. The second solution is characterized in that in the first solution, the payout when the symbol combination A stops is the same as the payout when the symbol combination B stops (the payout amount is two coins in both cases).

(c) Effect of original invention 14 According to the original invention, when a non-internal member who has not won a special prize wins, when a special prize is won, the winning flag is only for the special prize; When there is a special win in the inside, the winning flag becomes special role + special win. If the winning flags are different, the reel stop control can be made different. Utilizing this, in a specific win in a non-internal position, the symbol combination A that can be expected to move to an advantageous area is stopped, and in a specific win in an internal position, priority is given to stopping the symbol combination B (for example, the symbol combination B is stopped). do not stop combination A). As a result, by eliminating or reducing the stoppage of the symbol combination A that can be expected to move to an advantageous section when the special prize is inside, it gives the impression to the player that the draw was wasted. can be eliminated or reduced.

15. Original Invention 15 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 15 Conventionally, an instruction function activation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won) It is known to perform (AT). Here, it is known that control (management) of the AT is performed not only by a sub-control board but also by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). However, in conventional technology, even if you win a winning combination that is eligible for a bonus (for example, an addition to the number of AT games) during AT, there are circumstances in which the bonus cannot be awarded, such as when the upper limit for bonus awards has been reached. There were cases where there was. However, there is a problem in that if a bonus is not awarded even if a stop number to which a bonus is awarded appears, the player may feel distrustful. Therefore, the problem that the invention originally aims to solve is that when a winner is eligible for a benefit, if there are special circumstances that prevent the award from being given, the design corresponding to the winner that is eligible for a benefit is The goal is to prevent combinations of

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 15 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B) and a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (the number of acquisitions display LED 78 is displayed). (displaying push order instruction information) an instruction function activation game; a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed; an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function activation game can be executed; Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) that displays that it is a section, lottery means (winning lottery means 61) that executes a lottery so that there is a case of specific winning (single winning of small prize E1), and a reel control means (65) for controlling the reels to stop when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means, and when a specific winning is achieved, the symbol combination is stopped. It becomes possible to stop A (a combination of symbols in which a middle-tier cherry is displayed) or symbol combination B (a combination of symbols in which a middle-tier cherry is not displayed), and when the conditions for transitioning to an advantageous area are met, it will transition to an advantageous area and become an advantageous area. When the conditions for ending the section are met, the advantageous section ends, and when a specific win occurs in the advantageous section, it can be decided to award a benefit, and the reel control means controls the game in which the specific win occurs. , When the stop switch is operated in a specific operation mode (right first stop), control is performed so that symbol combination B can be stopped and symbol combination A is not stopped, resulting in a specific win in an advantageous section, The present invention is characterized in that when it is decided to award a benefit, the specific operating mode is not announced, and a specific winning occurs in an advantageous section, and when it is decided not to award the benefit, the specific operating mode is announced. The second solution is that in the first solution, the profit when the symbol combination A stops and the profit when the symbol combination B stops are the same (both have two payouts). characterized by something.

(c) Effect of original invention 15 According to the original invention, there are cases in which a benefit is granted based on a specific winning and cases in which it is not granted during an advantageous period, and when a benefit is granted, there are cases in which a benefit is granted based on a specific winning. If the corresponding symbol combination A is stopped but no benefits are given (for example, when the number of games in the advantageous section is close to the upper limit), symbol combination A will appear by notifying (instructing) a specific operation mode. I won't let you. This makes it possible to control the symbol combination A so that it does not appear in a situation where no privilege can be given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust that the bonus will not be awarded even though the symbol combination A has appeared.

16. Original Invention 16 (a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 16 The original invention provides a winning system in which the same winning combination is won regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch, and a winning system in which winning combinations are different depending on the operation mode of the stop switch. The present invention relates to a slot machine having the following functions. Conventionally, it has been known to execute an instruction function activation game (AT) that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct pressing order when a bell is won in the order of pressing) (for example, (Refer to Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-161344). In addition, it is known that there are two types of winning combinations: one in which winning combinations are different depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, a bell in the order of pressing), and one in which the winning combination is the same regardless of the operation manner of the stop switch (for example, a common bell). It is being If the winning probability of the push order bell or the common bell is varied according to the set value, the ball payout rate will be commensurate with the set value. However, if there is a difference in winning probability depending on the set value, there is a problem in that the set value is likely to be guessed by counting the number of winnings. Therefore, the problem that the invention originally aims to solve is that the winning combination may or may not be awarded depending on the operating mode of the stop switch (for example, the pressing order bell), and the To make it impossible to guess the set value while providing a difference in winning probability commensurate with the set value when a winning combination (for example, a common bell) is provided for winning a winning combination.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 16 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). The first solution comprises: a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6); a lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so that there is a possibility of a first win (winning small role A) or a second win (winning small role B group); and a reel control means (65) for controlling the stopping of the reel when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means, wherein the winning probability of the first win differs for at least two setting values, and the winning probability of the second win differs for at least two setting values, and the reel control means stops a predetermined combination of symbols ("Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay") in a game in which a first win has occurred, regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch, The reel control means, in a game resulting in a second win, controls the stopping of the reels so that the predetermined combination of symbols is or is not stopped depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, and has a setting value x (setting 1) and a setting value y (setting 6) as setting values, and when "probability of first win for setting value y (number of entries: 1250)" - "probability of first win for setting value x (number of entries: 1000)" = p1 (difference in numbers: 250), and "probability of second win for setting value y (number of entries: 770 x 12)" - "probability of second win for setting value x (number of entries: 750 x 12)" = p2 (difference in numbers: 240), p1 > p2. The second solution is the first solution, characterized in that the number of game media paid out when the specified combination of symbols stops (9) is the maximum number of game media paid out for the number of game media inserted (3) in that game.

(c) Effect of original invention 16 According to the original invention, the same combination of symbols (predetermined combination of symbols) is stopped at the first winning and when the pressing order is correct at the second winning. It is not possible to determine whether it is the first winning or the second winning just by stopping the combination of symbols. On the other hand, since the winning probability for the first winning regardless of the skill of the player is set to a larger difference than that for the second winning, the payout rate can be set according to the set value.

17. Original Invention 17 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 17 The original invention relates to a slot machine that has winning combinations that differ depending on the operating mode of a stop switch. Conventionally, it has been known to execute an instruction function activation game (AT) that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct pressing order when a bell is won in the order of pressing) (for example, (Refer to Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-161344). Now, an advantageous section is set up, and during the advantageous section, at least one instruction function activation game is executed, and the instruction function activation game is the maximum number of coins to be paid out in the prescribed number of the game state. etc. are being considered. Therefore, the problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to enable the instruction function activation game to be executed early when the above-mentioned instruction function activation game is to be executed once.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 17 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). The original invention comprises: a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6); a lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so that there is a possibility of a first win (winning small role A), a second win (winning small role B group), or a third win (winning small role C group); and a reel control means (65) for controlling the stopping of the reels when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means, wherein the probability of the first win differs for at least two of the setting values, and the reel control means stops a predetermined combination of symbols ("black 7/watermelon"-"bell C"-"replay") in a game in which a first win has occurred, regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch, In a game resulting in a second win, the reels are controlled to stop so that the predetermined combination of symbols may or may not be stopped depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, and in a game resulting in a third win, the reels are controlled to stop so that a specific combination of symbols ("Bell A/Bell B"-"Blue 7/Cherry"-"Watermelon") may or may not be stopped depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, the number of game media paid out when the predetermined combination of symbols stops (9 coins) is the maximum number of game media paid out for the specified number of game media in that game, and the probability of winning the second win (for example, setting 1, number of placements "750" x 12) is set higher than the probability of winning the third win (for example, setting 1, number of placements "200" x 3).

(c) Effect of original invention 17 According to the original invention, since the probability of winning the second prize is higher than the probability of winning the third prize, it is possible to obtain the maximum number of coins to be paid out in the specified number of playing states as early as possible. at least one instruction function activation game possible.

18. Original Invention 18 (a) Problems that Original Invention 18 is intended to solve It has been known in the past to execute an instruction function activation game (AT) that activates an instruction function that displays advantageous operation modes of the stop switch (for example, the correct push order when the push order bell is won). Here, it is known that the control (management) of the AT is executed on the main control board in addition to being executed on the sub-control board (for example, see JP 2014-161344 A). However, when roles that trigger a transition to an advantageous zone and roles that do not trigger a transition are provided, and both are capable of stopping the same combination of symbols, the problem arises as to what kind of reel stop control should be executed. Thus, the problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to appropriately control the reel stop when roles that trigger a transition to an advantageous zone and roles that do not trigger a transition are provided and these roles are won.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 18 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B) and a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (the number of acquisitions display LED 78 is displayed). (displaying push order instruction information) an instruction function activation game; a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed; and an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections; A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the setting values (settings 1 to 6), and a means for determining one of the setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13); a lottery means (winning combination lottery means 61) that executes a lottery such that there is a possibility that the winning result is 2 (winning of E2); and a reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling the reel control means (65), the winning probability of the first winning is the same for all setting values, the winning probability of the second winning is different for at least two setting values, and the winning probability of the second winning is different for at least two setting values, When the transition conditions are met, you can move to the advantageous section, when the end conditions of the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section ends, and when you become the first winner in the normal section, you can decide to move to the advantageous section. When the second winning occurs in the normal section, it is not decided to move to the advantageous section, and the reel control means controls both the first winning game and the second winning game. , the same stop control is executed (the middle cherry can be stopped when the left or middle first stop is made, and the middle cherry is not stopped when the right first stop is made).

The second solution is for a game that has an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when a small winning group B group is won), and a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. , an instruction function activation game in which an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (press order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), and a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed in the game section. , an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function activated game can be executed, and a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining any one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6). ), a lottery means (rotary lottery means 61) that performs a lottery so that there is a case of a first win (winning of minor prize E1) or a second prize (winning of minor prize E2); and a lottery method executed by the lottery means. and a reel control means (65) for controlling the reels to stop when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery, the probability of winning the first prize being the same for all set values, The probability of winning the second prize differs in at least two set values; when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are met, the winner moves to the advantageous section; when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section ends; When the first win is achieved in the section, it is possible to decide to move to the advantageous section, and when the second win is obtained in the normal section, it is not decided to move to the advantageous section, and the reel control means In the first winning game, the reels are controlled to stop so that a predetermined symbol combination (middle row cherry) is sometimes stopped and sometimes not, depending on the operation mode of the stop switch; In the game that resulted in the second winning, the reels are controlled to stop so that the predetermined combination of symbols may or may not be stopped depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, In a game that resulted in a second win and a game that resulted in a second win, when the stop switch is operated in an operation mode that stops the predetermined symbol combination (left or middle first stop), the same stop control is used to stop the predetermined combination of symbols. An operation to stop the combination of symbols (give priority to the winning of the small winning combination 36 that stops the middle cherry, and if it is not possible to win the small winning combination 36, win the small winning combination 38) and stop the combination of the predetermined symbols. When the stop switch is not operated (first stop on the right), a different stop control is executed (for example, when winning the first prize, win the small prize 38, and when winning the second prize, win the small prize 41). It is characterized by the following:

(c) Effect of the Initial Invention 18 According to the first solution, the same stop control is executed both at the first win and the second win, so the player cannot tell whether it is the first win that can determine the transition to the advantageous zone or the second win that does not determine the transition to the advantageous zone. Therefore, even though there is no difference in the setting of the probability of determining the transition to the advantageous zone, the player can be given the impression that there is a difference in the setting. Also, according to the second solution, when the stop switch is operated in a manner that stops a combination of predetermined symbols at the first win or the second win, it is possible to make the player unable to tell whether it is the first win that can determine the transition to the advantageous zone or the second win that does not determine the transition to the advantageous zone. On the other hand, when the stop switch is not operated in an operation manner that stops a combination of predetermined symbols, the player can be made to distinguish whether it is the first win that can determine the transition to the advantageous zone or the second win that does not determine the transition to the advantageous zone by the stop result or the like.

19. Original invention 19 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 19 Conventionally, an instruction function activation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won) It is known to perform (AT). Here, it is known that control (management) of the AT is executed not only by a sub-control board but also by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). By the way, when transitioning to a special game during an advantageous period, it is desirable to set a higher setting value so that more benefits are given during the advantageous period. However, when a benefit is provided in association with the winning of a conditional device, there is a demand that the benefit should be provided on the condition that a conditional device with no setting difference is won. Therefore, the problem that the invention was originally intended to solve was to provide a benefit on the condition that a conditional device with no setting difference is won when a special game is entered during the advantageous period, and the higher the setting value, the more the benefit. The goal is to increase the probability of being granted.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 19 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). The first solution comprises: a game having an advantageous operation mode (correct push order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won); an instruction function activation game in which an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (indicating push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78); a normal section within the game section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed; an advantageous section within the game section in which the instruction function activation game can be executed; a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6); and a lottery means for executing a lottery so that there is a case where a special win including a special role (a win including 1BBA) can be obtained; the probability of winning the special win is the same for all setting values; when the conditions for transition to the advantageous section are met, a transition to the advantageous section occurs, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section ends; When a special win occurs and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops, the game transitions to a special game (1BBA in operation); the condition for ending the special game is set to the number of game media paid out exceeding a predetermined number (150); the lottery means executes a lottery to allow for a special win (a win on Replay D) in the special game; the probability of a special win in the special game is the same for all set values; when a special win occurs in a special game during a favorable zone, it is possible to determine whether to award a bonus (add to the favorable zone); the set values are set value x (set value 1) and set value y (set value 6); and the expected number of times the game is played during the special game when set value y is greater than the expected number of times the game is played during the special game when set value x.

A second solution is that in the first solution, the lottery means executes a lottery in a special game so that the first prize or the second prize may be won. The winning probability of the second winning (winning of the minor role E2) differs in at least two setting values, and the winning probability of the second winning (winning of the minor role E2) differs in at least two setting values, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the first winning has stopped. The number of game media paid out at this time is greater than the number of game media paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second winning stops, and the probability of winning the first winning in the special game is higher than when the set value y. is set higher when the set value is x, and the probability of winning the second prize in the special game is set lower when the set value is x than when the set value is y. It is characterized by A third solution is that in the first or second solution, the specific win is a win related to a predetermined replay combination, and in the special game, the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined replay combination is stopped. Even if a special game is played, it is not counted in the number of game media paid out during the special game.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 19 According to the original invention, when the game shifts to the special game, the expected value of the number of games to stay in the special game is larger for the set value y than for the set value x. Therefore, a special game at the set value y has a higher probability of winning a specific prize than a special game at the set value x. Therefore, the set value y can increase the probability that a benefit will be awarded in a special game during an advantageous period than the set value x.

20. Initial Invention 20 (a) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 20 It has been known in the past to execute an instruction function activation game (AT) that activates an instruction function that displays advantageous operation modes of the stop switch (for example, the correct push order when the push order bell is won) (see, for example, JP 2014-161344 A). Here, when a bonus is awarded when a special game is played during a favorable zone, there is a demand that a bonus can be awarded in a special game based on winning a special role that does not have a setting difference, and that a bonus should not be awarded in a special game based on winning a special role with a setting difference. However, if set in this way, there is a problem that a special game based on winning a special role with a setting difference cannot give the player a sense of expectation of the award of a bonus. Therefore, the problem that the initial invention is to solve is to make it possible to expect the award of a bonus even when a special game based on winning a special role with a setting difference is played.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 20 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B) and a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (the number of acquisitions display LED 78 is displayed). (displaying push order instruction information) an instruction function activation game; a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed; and an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections; A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and the first special winning including the first special prize (1BBA) or the second and a lottery means for executing a lottery such that there is a case of a second special winning including a special prize (1BBB), the winning probability of the first special winning is the same for all setting values, and the winning probability of the second special winning is the same for all setting values, The winning probability differs in at least two set values, and when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are met, the winner moves to the advantageous section, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section ends and the first special prize is awarded. , When the combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st special role stops, the game moves to the 1st special game and becomes the 2nd special winning, and when the combination of symbols corresponding to the 2nd special role stops, the 2nd special game starts. During the first special game during the advantageous section, it is possible to decide to award the benefit, and during the second special game during the advantageous section, it is not decided to award the benefit, and the benefit is not decided. After the second special game ends, it is possible to decide to award a benefit under predetermined conditions.

The second solution is that in the first solution, when the first special game ends, the transition is made to the first game state (non-RT), and when the second special game ends, the first game state is In the second gaming state, the winning probability of the specific winning (replay E winning) is set higher than in the first gaming state, and the winning probability of the specific winning is , are the same for all set values, and are characterized in that it is possible to decide to award a benefit when a specific winning occurs within an advantageous section.

(c) Effect of the original invention 20 According to the original invention, when a first special game in which it is possible to determine whether or not a bonus will be awarded during the advantageous zone and a second special game in which it is not possible to determine whether or not a bonus will be awarded during the advantageous zone are provided, it is possible to award a bonus based on the completion of the second special game, so that even when the second special game is played, a sense of expectation that a bonus will be awarded can be created. Furthermore, for specific awards, it is possible to strike a balance between the first and second special games, and to provide uniqueness in the timing of awarding the bonus for each game.

21. Original Invention 21 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 21 Conventionally, an instruction function activation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won) (AT) is known (for example, see Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-161344). Here, in the case where an advantageous section is provided, if a special winning combination is won during the advantageous section and the transition is made to a special game, the issue is whether or not to continue counting the advantageous section (for example, subtracting the number of games played). . Therefore, the problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to adjust the count of the advantageous section when a special game is started during the advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 21 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses). In a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode (for example, a game when winning the small winning group B group) and a game in which the stop switch has an advantageous operation mode, an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode is activated (instruction of the order of pressing on the winning number display LED 78). an advantageous section comprising: an instruction function activation game (displaying information); a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not performed in the game section; and an advantageous section in which the instruction function activation game can be executed in the game section. When the transition conditions are met, the vehicle moves to the advantageous section, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section is terminated. A first counter (advantageous section counter 69a) that counts, a second counter (upper limit counter 69b) that counts a second variable for determining whether the upper limit end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and a first special win ( 1BBA) or a second special win including a second special win (1BBB), based on the count value of the first counter, When it is determined that the above-mentioned end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section ends, and when it is judged that the above-mentioned upper limit end condition is satisfied based on the count value of the second counter, the advantageous section ends even before the above-mentioned end condition is satisfied. When the first special winning occurs and the combination of symbols corresponding to the first special prize stops, the game moves to the first special game, the second special winning occurs, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the second special prize stops. When the period stops, the second special game will be started, and during the first special game during the advantageous section, it is possible to decide to add on the advantageous section, and when adding on the advantageous section, the above-mentioned termination conditions will be extended. However, during the second special game in the advantageous section, it is not decided to add the advantageous section, and during the first special game, the first counter and the second counter can be updated, and during the second special game, The second counter is updatable, and the first counter is not updated.

(c) Effect of original invention 21 According to the original invention, in the first special game in which it is possible to decide to add an advantageous section, the first counter is updated, but in the second special game in which it is not decided to add an advantageous section. Since the first counter is not updated in this case, the count of advantageous sections can be balanced between the first special game and the second special game.

1
Base part 10 Slot machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 15 Door switch 16 Board case 16a Caulking part 17 Display window 21 Performance lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Cross key 25 Menu button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37 Payout sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Medal input slot 43a Passage sensor 44 Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Settlement switch 50 (50A, 50B) Main control board (main Control means) 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM 54 ROM 55 Main CPU 61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Performance group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Prize determination means 67 Payout means 68 RT control means 69 Advantageous section control means 69a Advantageous section counter 69b Upper limit counter 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command transmission means 72 Management information control means 73 Set value display LED 74 Management information display LED 75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED 77 Advantage Section display LED 78 Acquisition number display LED 80 Sub control board (sub control means) 81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM 84 ROM 85 Sub CPU 91 Production output control means 100 External centralized terminal board 200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

A predetermined display means capable of displaying game history information is provided,
The gaming history information is composed of information on the type of gaming history and numerical information on the gaming history,
As the game history information, there are a case where the information on the ratio of the reels for a predetermined number of games is displayed, a case where the information on the ratio of the reels for a cumulative number of games is displayed, and a case where the information on the ratio of the reels for a cumulative number of games is displayed.
The numerical information on the game history corresponding to the bonus ratio information for the predetermined number of games is the bonus ratio for the predetermined number of games (the ratio of the number of game media paid out when the bonus is activated for the predetermined number of games to the total number of game media paid out for the predetermined number of games),
The numerical information on the gaming history corresponding to the cumulative feature ratio information is the cumulative feature ratio (the ratio of the number of game media paid out when the feature is activated to the total number of game media paid out),
The numerical information on the game history corresponding to the cumulative consecutive feature ratio information is a cumulative first-class special feature ratio (the ratio of the number of game media paid out when the first-class special feature is activated to the total number of game media paid out),
The first display unit and the second display unit of the predetermined display means are capable of displaying information regarding the type of game history;
The third display unit and the fourth display unit of the predetermined display means are capable of displaying numerical information relating to a gaming history;
When the game history information is displayed on the predetermined display means, the DP segment of the second display section is configured to be lighted up;
When displaying the cumulative feature ratio information, if the cumulative number of games is less than a specific value, information regarding the type of game history corresponding to the cumulative feature ratio information can be displayed in a flashing manner;
When displaying the information on the ratio of the features for a predetermined number of games, if the cumulative number of games is less than a predetermined value (the predetermined value is a value smaller than a specific value), information on the type of game history corresponding to the information on the ratio of the features for the predetermined number of games can be displayed in a flashing manner.
When the total number of game media to be paid out reaches a predetermined upper limit, the updating of the total number of game media to be paid out is terminated.
This slot machine is characterized in that it is configured to terminate updating of the cumulative number of plays when the cumulative number of plays reaches a specific upper limit value (the specific upper limit value may be the same value as a predetermined upper limit value).

Images